TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 372

xx

TG8000
Multiformat Test Signal Generator
ZZZ

Service Manual

*P077068700*
077-0687-00
xx TG8000
Multiformat Test Signal Generator
ZZZ

Service Manual

www.tektronix.com
077-0687-00
Copyright © Tektronix. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries
or suppliers, and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication
supersedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.

Contacting Tektronix
Tektronix, Inc.
14150 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA

For product information, sales, service, and technical support:


In North America, call 1-800-833-9200.
Worldwide, visit www.tektronix.com to find contacts in your area.
Warranty
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its
option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement
in exchange for the defective product. Parts, modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty
work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance. All replaced parts, modules and products become
the property of Tektronix.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of
the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible
for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping
charges prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within
the country in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping
charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage
resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product;
b) to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage
or malfunction caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or
integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty
of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE
AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.
TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
[W2 – 15AUG04]
Table of Contents
Important safety information .................................................................................... xiv
General safety summary .................................................................................... xiv
Service safety summary ..................................................................................... xvi
Terms in this manual ....................................................................................... xvii
Symbols and terms on the product ........................................................................ xvii
Preface ............................................................................................................. xix
Manual structure ............................................................................................. xix
Manual conventions .......................................................................................... xx
Product documentation...................................................................................... xxi

Service basics
Service introduction .............................................................................................. 1-1
Performance check interval................................................................................. 1-1
Strategy for servicing........................................................................................ 1-2
Tektronix service offerings ................................................................................. 1-2
Module compatibility between the TG8000 and TG700 mainframes.................................. 1-3
Product maintenance ............................................................................................. 1-4
Service preparation .......................................................................................... 1-4
Inspection and cleaning ..................................................................................... 1-6
Module installation and removal.............................................................................. 1-10
To install a module......................................................................................... 1-11
To remove a module ....................................................................................... 1-14
Repacking instructions ......................................................................................... 1-16

TG8000 mainframe
Mainframe service overview .................................................................................... 2-1
Mainframe clock adjustment .................................................................................... 2-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................... 2-2
To adjust the master clock using a frequency signal generator ......................................... 2-2
To adjust the master clock using an installed GPS7 module ............................................ 2-5
Mainframe theory of operation.................................................................................. 2-7
Main board ................................................................................................... 2-7
Power Supply module ....................................................................................... 2-8
Mainframe diagram .............................................................................................. 2-9
Mainframe troubleshooting.................................................................................... 2-10
Diagnostics and performance checks .................................................................... 2-10
Mainframe troubleshooting ............................................................................... 2-16

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual i


Table of Contents

Mainframe removal and installation procedures ............................................................ 2-19


Preparation.................................................................................................. 2-19
Access procedure .......................................................................................... 2-24
Locking line cord .......................................................................................... 2-24
Top cover ................................................................................................... 2-25
Front Panel assembly...................................................................................... 2-26
Front Panel subassemblies ................................................................................ 2-28
Power Supply module subassemblies ................................................................... 2-30
Main board ................................................................................................. 2-33
Mainframe replaceable parts list .............................................................................. 2-35
Parts ordering information ................................................................................ 2-35
Using the replaceable parts list ........................................................................... 2-36

AG7 Audio Generator module


AG7 module service overview .................................................................................. 3-1
AG7 module theory of operation ............................................................................... 3-2
AG7 module interconnect diagram ............................................................................. 3-3
AG7 module troubleshooting ................................................................................... 3-4
Required equipment ......................................................................................... 3-4
To back up the instrument settings......................................................................... 3-4
AG7 module troubleshooting trees ........................................................................ 3-5
AG7 module removal and replacement ........................................................................ 3-7
Required tools ................................................................................................ 3-7
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis................................................... 3-8
AG7 module replaceable parts list.............................................................................. 3-9

AGL7 Analog Genlock module


AGL7 module service overview ................................................................................ 4-1
AGL7 module adjustment procedures.......................................................................... 4-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................... 4-2
Required equipment ......................................................................................... 4-2
To adjust the output offset and gain........................................................................ 4-3
To adjust the clock timing (older versions only) ......................................................... 4-7
AGL7 module theory of operation............................................................................ 4-12
Analog genlock ............................................................................................ 4-12
Black burst generator...................................................................................... 4-12
AGL7 module interconnect diagram ......................................................................... 4-14
AGL7 module troubleshooting................................................................................ 4-15
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 4-15
To back up the instrument settings....................................................................... 4-15

ii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Table of Contents

AGL7 module troubleshooting trees..................................................................... 4-16


AGL7 module removal and replacement .................................................................... 4-18
Required tools .............................................................................................. 4-18
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis ................................................. 4-18
AGL7 module replaceable parts list .......................................................................... 4-21

ATG7 Analog Test Generator module


ATG7 module service overview ................................................................................ 5-1
ATG7 module adjustment procedures .......................................................................... 5-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................... 5-2
Required equipment ......................................................................................... 5-2
To adjust the output offset and gain........................................................................ 5-3
To adjust chroma gain ....................................................................................... 5-6
ATG7 module theory of operation .............................................................................. 5-9
ATG7 module interconnect diagram.......................................................................... 5-10
ATG7 module troubleshooting ................................................................................ 5-11
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 5-11
To back up the instrument settings....................................................................... 5-11
ATG7 module troubleshooting trees ..................................................................... 5-12
ATG7 module removal and replacement..................................................................... 5-14
Required tools .............................................................................................. 5-14
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis ................................................. 5-14
ATG7 module replaceable parts list .......................................................................... 5-16

AVG7 Analog Video Generator module


AVG7 module service overview ................................................................................ 6-1
AVG7 module adjustment procedures.......................................................................... 6-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................... 6-2
Required equipment ......................................................................................... 6-3
To adjust the output offset and gain........................................................................ 6-4
To adjust group delay........................................................................................ 6-6
To adjust the frequency response ........................................................................ 6-10
To adjust interchannel delay .............................................................................. 6-14
To confirm the frequency response ...................................................................... 6-18
To confirm the interchannel delay ....................................................................... 6-18
AVG7 module theory of operation............................................................................ 6-19
AVG7 module interconnect diagram ......................................................................... 6-21
AVG7 module troubleshooting................................................................................ 6-22
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 6-22
To back up the instrument settings....................................................................... 6-22

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual iii


Table of Contents

AVG7 module troubleshooting trees..................................................................... 6-23


AVG7 module removal and replacement..................................................................... 6-25
Required tools .............................................................................................. 6-25
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis................................................. 6-26
AVG7 module replaceable parts list .......................................................................... 6-27

AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module


AWVG7 module service overview ............................................................................. 7-1
AWVG7 module adjustment procedures....................................................................... 7-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................... 7-2
Required equipment ......................................................................................... 7-3
To adjust the output offset and gain........................................................................ 7-4
To adjust the frequency response .......................................................................... 7-7
AWVG7 module theory of operation......................................................................... 7-11
AWVG7 module interconnect diagram ...................................................................... 7-13
AWVG7 module troubleshooting ............................................................................. 7-14
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 7-14
To back up the instrument settings....................................................................... 7-14
AWVG7 module troubleshooting trees.................................................................. 7-15
AWVG7 module removal and replacement.................................................................. 7-17
Required tools .............................................................................................. 7-17
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis................................................. 7-18
AWVG7 module replaceable parts list ....................................................................... 7-19

BG7 Black Generator module


BG7 module service overview .................................................................................. 8-1
BG7 module adjustment procedures............................................................................ 8-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................... 8-2
Required equipment ......................................................................................... 8-2
To adjust the output offset and gain........................................................................ 8-3
To adjust chroma gain (Option CB only).................................................................. 8-5
BG7 module theory of operation................................................................................ 8-8
BG7 module interconnect diagram ............................................................................. 8-9
BG7 module troubleshooting.................................................................................. 8-10
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 8-10
To back up the instrument settings....................................................................... 8-10
BG7 module troubleshooting trees....................................................................... 8-11
BG7 module removal and replacement ...................................................................... 8-13
Required tools .............................................................................................. 8-13
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis................................................. 8-14

iv TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Table of Contents

BG7 module replaceable parts list ............................................................................ 8-15

DVG7 Digital Video Generator module


DVG7 module service overview ................................................................................ 9-1
DVG7 module adjustment procedures ......................................................................... 9-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................... 9-2
Required equipment ......................................................................................... 9-2
To adjust the output level ................................................................................... 9-3
DVG7 module theory of operation ........................................................................... 9-10
DVG7 module interconnect diagram ......................................................................... 9-12
DVG7 module troubleshooting ............................................................................... 9-13
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 9-13
To back up the instrument settings....................................................................... 9-13
DVG7 module troubleshooting trees .................................................................... 9-14
DVG7 module removal and replacement .................................................................... 9-16
Required tools .............................................................................................. 9-16
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis ................................................. 9-17
DVG7 module replaceable parts list.......................................................................... 9-18

GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module


GPS7 module service overview ............................................................................... 10-1
GPS7 module adjustment procedures ........................................................................ 10-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................. 10-2
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 10-2
To adjust black burst level and offset.................................................................... 10-3
GPS7 module theory of operation ............................................................................ 10-5
GPS7 module troubleshooting ................................................................................ 10-8
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 10-8
Problem identification ..................................................................................... 10-9
Troubleshooting procedures ............................................................................. 10-11
GPS7 module removal and replacement .................................................................... 10-23
Required tools ............................................................................................. 10-23
To remove the GPS7 module ............................................................................ 10-24
To replace the Antenna Power indicator (light pipe).................................................. 10-24
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis ................................................ 10-24

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual v


Table of Contents

GPS7 module replaceable parts list.......................................................................... 10-26

HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module


HD3G7 module service overview ............................................................................ 11-1
HD3G7 module adjustment procedures ...................................................................... 11-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................. 11-2
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 11-2
Adjustment procedures.................................................................................... 11-3
HD3G7 module theory of operation .......................................................................... 11-9
Overview ................................................................................................... 11-9
FPGA and associated circuits ............................................................................ 11-9
Clocks and frames ........................................................................................ 11-10
Input and output boards .................................................................................. 11-10
Power supplies ............................................................................................ 11-11
HD3G7 module troubleshooting ............................................................................. 11-12
Required equipment ...................................................................................... 11-12
Problem identification .................................................................................... 11-13
HD3G7 module troubleshooting procedures .......................................................... 11-14
HD3G7 module removal and replacement.................................................................. 11-22
Required tools ............................................................................................. 11-22
To remove the HD3G7 module.......................................................................... 11-22
To disassemble the HD3G7 module .................................................................... 11-22
To reassemble the HD3G7 module ..................................................................... 11-23
HD3G7 module replaceable parts list ....................................................................... 11-25

HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module


HDLG7 module service overview ............................................................................ 12-1
HDLG7 module theory of operation.......................................................................... 12-2
HDLG7 module interconnect diagram ....................................................................... 12-4
HDLG7 module troubleshooting.............................................................................. 12-5
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 12-5
To back up the instrument settings....................................................................... 12-5
HDLG7 module troubleshooting trees .................................................................. 12-6
HDLG7 module removal and replacement .................................................................. 12-8
Required tools .............................................................................................. 12-8
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis................................................. 12-9

vi TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Table of Contents

HDLG7 module replaceable parts list ....................................................................... 12-10

HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module


HDVG7 module service overview............................................................................ 13-1
HDVG7 module adjustment procedures ..................................................................... 13-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................. 13-2
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 13-2
To adjust the output level ................................................................................. 13-3
HDVG7 module theory of operation ........................................................................ 13-10
HDVG7 module interconnect diagram ...................................................................... 13-12
HDVG7 module troubleshooting ............................................................................ 13-13
Required equipment ...................................................................................... 13-13
To back up the instrument settings...................................................................... 13-13
HDVG7 module troubleshooting trees ................................................................. 13-14
HDVG7 module removal and replacement ................................................................. 13-16
Required tools ............................................................................................. 13-16
How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis ................................................ 13-17
HDVG7 module replaceable parts list....................................................................... 13-18

SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module


SDI7 module service overview ............................................................................... 14-1
SDI7 module adjustment procedures ......................................................................... 14-2
Requirements for adjustment ............................................................................. 14-2
Required equipment ....................................................................................... 14-2
Adjustment procedures.................................................................................... 14-3
SDI7 module theory of operation ............................................................................ 14-10
Overview .................................................................................................. 14-10
FPGA and associated circuits ........................................................................... 14-10
Clocks and frames ........................................................................................ 14-11
Output boards ............................................................................................. 14-11
Power supplies ............................................................................................ 14-12
SDI7 module troubleshooting ................................................................................ 14-13
Required equipment ...................................................................................... 14-13
Problem identification .................................................................................... 14-14
Troubleshooting procedures ............................................................................. 14-15
SDI7 module removal and replacement..................................................................... 14-27
Required tools ............................................................................................. 14-27
To remove the SDI7 module............................................................................. 14-27
To disassemble the SDI7 module ....................................................................... 14-27
To reassemble the SDI7 module ........................................................................ 14-28

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual vii


Table of Contents

SDI7 module replaceable parts list .......................................................................... 14-30

viii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


List of Figures
Figure 1-1: TG8000 slot numbering.......................................................................... 1-11
Figure 1-2: Removing the blank panel ....................................................................... 1-12
Figure 1-3: Installing a module ............................................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-4: Securing a module................................................................................ 1-13
Figure 1-5: Removing a module .............................................................................. 1-15
Figure 2-1: Equipment connection for adjusting the master clock frequency using a frequency
standard ....................................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-2: TG8000 block diagram ............................................................................ 2-9
Figure 2-3: Slot diagnostics test points on the GPS7 module ............................................. 2-15
Figure 2-4: Main board (view from top) ..................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-5: TG8000 orientation............................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2-6: Top cover, line cord, and Front Panel assembly............................................... 2-22
Figure 2-7: Mainframe, Main board, and Power Supply module ......................................... 2-23
Figure 2-8: Removing the locking line cord................................................................. 2-24
Figure 2-9: Removing the top cover ......................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-10: Removing the Front Panel assembly.......................................................... 2-27
Figure 2-11: Disassembling the Front Panel assembly ..................................................... 2-29
Figure 2-12: Installing the fan ................................................................................ 2-31
Figure 2-13: Removing the LAN board, fan, and RFI filter from the Power Supply module.......... 2-32
Figure 2-14: Main board removal ............................................................................ 2-34
Figure 2-15: Mainframe replaceable parts................................................................... 2-37
Figure 2-16: Chassis assembly replaceable parts ........................................................... 2-39
Figure 2-17: Front Panel assembly replaceable parts....................................................... 2-41
Figure 2-18: Power Supply assembly replaceable parts.................................................... 2-43
Figure 2-19: Blank panel replaceable parts.................................................................. 2-44
Figure 3-1: Simplified block diagram of the AG7 module .................................................. 3-2
Figure 3-2: AG7 module interconnect diagram ............................................................... 3-3
Figure 3-3: AG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)..................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-4: AG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)..................................................... 3-6
Figure 3-5: AG7 module exploded view..................................................................... 3-10
Figure 4-1: AGL7 module circuit board ....................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the output offset and gain ............................... 4-4
Figure 4-3: AGL7 module circuit board (older versions only) .............................................. 4-7
Figure 4-4: Timing relationship between CH1 and CH2 signals.......................................... 4-10
Figure 4-5: Simplified block diagram of the AGL7 module............................................... 4-13
Figure 4-6: AGL7 module interconnect diagram ........................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-7: AGL7 module troubleshooting procedure (1) ................................................. 4-16
Figure 4-8: AGL7 module troubleshooting procedure (2) ................................................. 4-17
Figure 4-9: Dressing the AGL7 module BNC cables ...................................................... 4-19

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual ix


Table of Contents

Figure 4-10: AGL7 module exploded view ................................................................. 4-22


Figure 5-1: ATG7 module circuit board ....................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the ATG7 output offset and gain ....................... 5-3
Figure 5-3: Equipment connection for adjusting ATG7 chroma gain ...................................... 5-6
Figure 5-4: Triggered display for adjusting the ATG7 module chroma gain .............................. 5-7
Figure 5-5: Simplified block diagram of the ATG7 module ................................................. 5-9
Figure 5-6: ATG7 module interconnect diagram ........................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-7: ATG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1) ................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-8: ATG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2) ................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-9: ATG7 module exploded view ................................................................... 5-17
Figure 6-1: Location of the variable resistors for the output offset and gain adjustment................. 6-4
Figure 6-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the output offset and gain ............................... 6-4
Figure 6-3: Location of the variable resistors and capacitors for the group delay adjustment ........... 6-7
Figure 6-4: Equipment connection for adjusting the group delay........................................... 6-7
Figure 6-5: Adjusting the baseline of the modulated 20T pulse signal..................................... 6-9
Figure 6-6: Location of the variable resistors and capacitors for the frequency response adjustment 6-10
Figure 6-7: Equipment connection for adjusting the frequency response ................................ 6-11
Figure 6-8: Adjusting the signal amplitudes................................................................. 6-13
Figure 6-9: Location of the variable capacitors for the interchannel delay adjustment................. 6-14
Figure 6-10: Equipment connection for adjusting the interchannel delay................................ 6-15
Figure 6-11: Simplified block diagram of the AVG7 module ............................................. 6-20
Figure 6-12: AVG7 module interconnect diagram.......................................................... 6-21
Figure 6-13: AVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)................................................ 6-23
Figure 6-14: AVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)................................................ 6-24
Figure 6-15: AVG7 module exploded view ................................................................. 6-28
Figure 7-1: Location of the variable resistors for the output offset and gain adjustment................. 7-4
Figure 7-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the output offset and gain ............................... 7-4
Figure 7-3: Location of the variable capacitors for the frequency response adjustment.................. 7-7
Figure 7-4: Equipment connection for adjusting the frequency response .................................. 7-8
Figure 7-5: Minimizing the amplitude changes ............................................................. 7-10
Figure 7-6: Simplified block diagram of the AWVG7 module ............................................ 7-12
Figure 7-7: AWVG7 module interconnect diagram ........................................................ 7-13
Figure 7-8: AWVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1) .............................................. 7-15
Figure 7-9: AWVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2) .............................................. 7-16
Figure 7-10: AWVG7 module exploded view .............................................................. 7-20
Figure 8-1: BG7 module circuit board ......................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the BG7 output offset and gain......................... 8-3
Figure 8-3: Equipment connection for adjusting chroma gain .............................................. 8-6
Figure 8-4: Triggered display for adjusting the BG7 module chroma gain ................................ 8-7
Figure 8-5: Simplified block diagram of the BG7 module................................................... 8-8
Figure 8-6: BG7 module interconnect diagram ............................................................... 8-9

x TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Table of Contents

Figure 8-7: BG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1) ................................................... 8-11


Figure 8-8: BG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2) ................................................... 8-12
Figure 8-9: BG7 module exploded view..................................................................... 8-16
Figure 9-1: DVG7 module circuit board....................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9-2: Simplified block diagram of the DVG7 module .............................................. 9-11
Figure 9-3: DVG7 module interconnect diagram ........................................................... 9-12
Figure 9-4: DVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)................................................. 9-14
Figure 9-5: DVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)................................................. 9-15
Figure 9-6: DVG7 module exploded view .................................................................. 9-19
Figure 10-1: Equipment connections for GPS7 module adjustments..................................... 10-3
Figure 10-2: Simplified block diagram of the GPS7 module .............................................. 10-7
Figure 10-3: GPS7 power supply test ....................................................................... 10-14
Figure 10-4: GPS7 voltage test point and fuse locations.................................................. 10-16
Figure 10-5: GPS7 module replaceable parts .............................................................. 10-27
Figure 11-1: Simplified block diagram of the HD3G7 module........................................... 11-11
Figure 11-2: HD3G7 module power supply test points ................................................... 11-18
Figure 11-3: No_Input_Detect test point location on the HD3G7 module.............................. 11-21
Figure 11-4: HD3G7 module main board installation ..................................................... 11-24
Figure 11-5: HD3G7 module – replaceable parts .......................................................... 11-26
Figure 11-6: HD3G7 module main board – replaceable parts ............................................ 11-27
Figure 12-1: Simplified block diagram of the HDLG7 module ........................................... 12-3
Figure 12-2: HDLG7 module connections .................................................................. 12-4
Figure 12-3: HDLG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1) ............................................. 12-6
Figure 12-4: HDLG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2) ............................................. 12-7
Figure 12-5: HDLG7 module exploded view .............................................................. 12-11
Figure 13-1: HDVG7 module circuit board ................................................................. 13-3
Figure 13-2: Simplified block diagram of the HDVG7 module.......................................... 13-11
Figure 13-3: HDVG7 module interconnect diagram ...................................................... 13-12
Figure 13-4: HDVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1) ............................................ 13-14
Figure 13-5: HDVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2) ............................................ 13-15
Figure 13-6: HDVG7 module exploded view .............................................................. 13-19
Figure 14-1: Simplified block diagram of the SDI7 Generator module ................................. 14-12
Figure 14-2: SDI7 power supply test points................................................................ 14-22
Figure 14-3: SDI7 module main board installation ........................................................ 14-29
Figure 14-4: SDI7 module – replaceable parts ............................................................. 14-31
Figure 14-5: SDI7 module main board – replaceable parts ............................................... 14-32

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual xi


Table of Contents

List of Tables
Table i: TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator documentation....................................... xxi
Table 1-1: External inspection checklist ....................................................................... 1-7
Table 1-2: Internal inspection checklist ........................................................................ 1-8
Table 2-1: Equipment required to adjust the master clock using a signal generator ...................... 2-2
Table 2-2: Equipment required to adjust the master clock using a GPS7 module......................... 2-5
Table 2-3: Slot diagnostics error codes ...................................................................... 2-13
Table 2-4: Mainframe troubleshooting procedures ......................................................... 2-16
Table 2-5: Tools required for module removal .............................................................. 2-20
Table 2-6: Parts list column descriptions .................................................................... 2-36
Table 2-7: Mainframe replaceable parts ..................................................................... 2-37
Table 2-8: Chassis assembly replaceable parts .............................................................. 2-38
Table 2-9: Front Panel assembly replaceable parts ......................................................... 2-40
Table 2-10: Power Supply assembly replaceable parts..................................................... 2-42
Table 2-11: Blank panel replaceable parts ................................................................... 2-44
Table 2-12: Standard and optional accessories for TG8000 mainframe.................................. 2-45
Table 3-1: Equipment required to troubleshoot the AG7 module ........................................... 3-4
Table 3-2: Required tools for removal and replacement of AG7 module .................................. 3-7
Table 3-3: AG7 module – replaceable parts ................................................................... 3-9
Table 4-1: Equipment required for AGL7 module adjustment procedures ................................ 4-2
Table 4-2: Equipment required for AGL7 module troubleshooting....................................... 4-15
Table 4-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of AGL7 module .............................. 4-18
Table 4-4: AGL7 module – replaceable parts ............................................................... 4-21
Table 5-1: Equipment required for ATG7 module adjustment procedures................................. 5-2
Table 5-2: Equipment required for ATG7 module troubleshooting ....................................... 5-11
Table 5-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of ATG7 module............................... 5-14
Table 5-4: ATG7 module – replaceable parts................................................................ 5-16
Table 6-1: Equipment required for the AVG7 module adjustment procedures ............................ 6-3
Table 6-2: Equipment required for AVG7 module troubleshooting....................................... 6-22
Table 6-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of the AVG7 module .......................... 6-25
Table 6-4: AVG7 module – replaceable parts ............................................................... 6-27
Table 7-1: Equipment required for AWVG7 module adjustment procedures.............................. 7-3
Table 7-2: Equipment required for AWVG7 module troubleshooting.................................... 7-14
Table 7-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of AWVG7 module ........................... 7-17
Table 7-4: AWVG7 module – replaceable parts ............................................................ 7-19
Table 8-1: Equipment required for BG7 module adjustment procedures .................................. 8-2
Table 8-2: Equipment required for BG7 module troubleshooting ........................................ 8-10
Table 8-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of BG7 module ................................ 8-13
Table 8-4: BG7 module – replaceable parts ................................................................. 8-15

xii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Table of Contents

Table 9-1: Equipment required for the DVG7 module adjustment procedures ............................ 9-2
Table 9-2: DVG7 output amplitude ............................................................................ 9-7
Table 9-3: Equipment required for DVG7 module troubleshooting ...................................... 9-13
Table 9-4: Required tools for removal and replacement of DVG7 module .............................. 9-16
Table 9-5: DVG7 module – replaceable parts ............................................................... 9-18
Table 10-1: Equipment required for the GPS7 module adjustment procedures ......................... 10-2
Table 10-2: Equipment required for GPS7 module troubleshooting...................................... 10-8
Table 10-3: GPS7 module troubleshooting .................................................................. 10-9
Table 10-4: POST error codes ............................................................................... 10-11
Table 10-5: Power supply test points........................................................................ 10-15
Table 10-6: Required tools for GPS7 module removal and replacement................................ 10-23
Table 10-7: GPS7 module – replaceable parts ............................................................. 10-26
Table 11-1: Equipment required for HD3G7 module adjustment procedures ........................... 11-2
Table 11-2: HD3G7 module SDI output amplitude......................................................... 11-4
Table 11-3: Equipment required to troubleshoot the HD3G7 module ................................... 11-12
Table 11-4: HD3G7 module troubleshooting............................................................... 11-13
Table 11-5: POST error codes................................................................................ 11-14
Table 11-6: HD3G7 module factory default settings ...................................................... 11-17
Table 11-7: Required tools for HD3G7 module removal and replacement ............................. 11-22
Table 11-8: HD3G7 module – replaceable parts ........................................................... 11-25
Table 11-9: HD3G7 module main board – replaceable parts ............................................. 11-27
Table 12-1: Equipment required for HDLG7 module troubleshooting ................................... 12-5
Table 12-2: Required tools for removal and replacement of the HDLG7 module ...................... 12-8
Table 12-3: HDLG7 module – replaceable parts........................................................... 12-10
Table 13-1: Equipment required for the HDVG7 module adjustment procedures ...................... 13-2
Table 13-2: HDVG7 output amplitude ....................................................................... 13-7
Table 13-3: Equipment required for HDVG7 module troubleshooting.................................. 13-13
Table 13-4: Required tools for removal and replacement of the HDVG7 module ..................... 13-16
Table 13-5: HDVG7 module – replaceable parts .......................................................... 13-18
Table 14-1: Equipment required for the SDI7 module adjustment procedures .......................... 14-2
Table 14-2: SDI7 module SDI output amplitude............................................................ 14-6
Table 14-3: Equipment required to troubleshoot the SDI7 module ...................................... 14-13
Table 14-4: SDI7 troubleshooting ........................................................................... 14-14
Table 14-5: POST error codes ............................................................................... 14-15
Table 14-6: SDI7 module factory default settings ......................................................... 14-18
Table 14-7: Required tools for SDI7 module removal and replacement ................................ 14-27
Table 14-8: SDI7 module – replaceable parts .............................................................. 14-30
Table 14-9: SDI7 module main board – replaceable parts ................................................ 14-32

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual xiii


Important safety information

Important safety information


This manual contains information and warnings that must be followed by the user
for safe operation and to keep the product in a safe condition.
To safely perform service on this product, additional information is provided at
the end of this section. (See page xvi, Service safety summary.)

General safety summary


Use the product only as specified. Review the following safety precautions to
avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it.
Carefully read all instructions. Retain these instructions for future reference.
Comply with local and national safety codes.
For correct and safe operation of the product, it is essential that you follow
generally accepted safety procedures in addition to the safety precautions specified
in this manual.
The product is designed to be used by trained personnel only.
Only qualified personnel who are aware of the hazards involved should remove
the cover for repair, maintenance, or adjustment.
Before use, always check the product with a known source to be sure it is
operating correctly.
This product is not intended for detection of hazardous voltages.
Use personal protective equipment to prevent shock and arc blast injury where
hazardous live conductors are exposed.
While using this product, you may need to access other parts of a larger system.
Read the safety sections of the other component manuals for warnings and
cautions related to operating the system.
When incorporating this equipment into a system, the safety of that system is the
responsibility of the assembler of the system.

To avoid fire or personal Use proper power cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
injury certified for the country of use.
Do not use the provided power cord for other products.

Ground the product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, make sure that the product is properly grounded.

xiv TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Important safety information

Power disconnect. The power cord disconnects the product from the power
source. See instructions for the location. Do not position the equipment so that it
is difficult to disconnect the power cord; it must remain accessible to the user at
all times to allow for quick disconnection if needed.

Do not operate without covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed, or with the case open. Hazardous voltage exposure is possible.

Avoid exposed circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components


when power is present.

Do not operate with suspected failures. If you suspect that there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Disable the product if it is damaged. Do not use the product if it is damaged
or operates incorrectly. If in doubt about safety of the product, turn it off and
disconnect the power cord. Clearly mark the product to prevent its further
operation.
Examine the exterior of the product before you use it. Look for cracks or missing
pieces.
Use only specified replacement parts.

Do not operate in wet/damp conditions. Be aware that condensation may occur if


a unit is moved from a cold to a warm environment.

Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere.


Keep product surfaces clean and dry. Remove the input signals before you clean
the product.

Provide proper ventilation. Refer to the installation instructions in the manual for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
Slots and openings are provided for ventilation and should never be covered or
otherwise obstructed. Do not push objects into any of the openings.

Provide a safe working environment. Always place the product in a location


convenient for viewing the display and indicators.
Avoid improper or prolonged use of keyboards, pointers, and button pads.
Improper or prolonged keyboard or pointer use may result in serious injury.
Be sure your work area meets applicable ergonomic standards. Consult with an
ergonomics professional to avoid stress injuries.
Use only the Tektronix rackmount hardware specified for this product.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual xv


Important safety information

Service safety summary


The Service safety summary section contains additional information required to
safely perform service on the product. Only qualified personnel should perform
service procedures. Read this Service safety summary and the General safety
summary before performing any service procedures.

To avoid electric shock. Do not touch exposed connections.

Do not service alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this


product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is
present.

Disconnect power. To avoid electric shock, switch off the product power and
disconnect the power cord from the mains power before removing any covers or
panels, or opening the case for servicing.

Use care when servicing with power on. Dangerous voltages or currents may exist
in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and disconnect
test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing components.

Verify safety after repair. Always recheck ground continuity and mains dielectric
strength after performing a repair.

xvi TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Important safety information

Terms in this manual


These terms may appear in this manual:

WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result


in injury or loss of life.

CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in


damage to this product or other property.

Symbols and terms on the product


These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read
the marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you
read the marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.

When this symbol is marked on the product, be sure to consult the manual
to find out the nature of the potential hazards and any actions which have to
be taken to avoid them. (This symbol may also be used to refer the user to
ratings in the manual.)

The following symbol(s) may appear on the product:

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual xvii


Important safety information

xviii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Preface
This manual contains information needed to service a TG8000 Multiformat Test
Signal Generator and its associated modules to the module level.

Manual structure
This manual is divided into sections. Each section contains information about the
mainframe or a module. Further, sections are divided into subsections.
Read the introductions to the procedures you find in each subsection. They
provide information you need to perform the service correctly and efficiently.
Each section in this manual contains the following subsections:
Maintenance contains information and procedures for performing preventive
and corrective maintenance for the TG8000 mainframe or module. These
instructions include cleaning, module removal and installation, and fault
isolation to the module level.
Adjustment procedures contains procedures for adjusting a TG8000
mainframe or module to meet warranted characteristics.
Theory of operation contains circuit descriptions that support service to the
module level.
Diagrams contains a block diagram and an interconnect diagram.
Troubleshooting contains information and procedures to help you isolate and
fix various problems.
Remove and replace procedures contains procedures to safely remove
replaceable modules from the mainframe and product modules.
Replaceable parts list includes a table of all replaceable modules, their
descriptions, and their Tektronix part numbers.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual xix


Preface

Manual conventions
This manual uses certain conventions with which you should become familiar.
Some sections of the manual contain procedures for you to perform. To keep those
instructions clear and consistent, this manual uses the following conventions:
Names of front panel controls and menus appear in the same case (initial
capitals, all uppercase, etc.) in the manual as is used on the TG8000 front
panel and menus.
Instruction steps are numbered unless there is only one step.
Bold text refers to specific interface elements that you are instructed to select,
click, or clear.
Example: Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
Italic text refers to document names or sections. Italics are also used in
NOTES, CAUTIONS, and WARNINGS.
Example: The Diagrams section includes a block diagram and an
interconnect diagram.

Modules Throughout this manual, the term module appears. A module is composed of
electrical and mechanical assemblies, circuit cards, and interconnecting cables.
References to a module are different than references to a product module such as
“AGL7 Genlock module” which is a product installed in the TG8000 mainframe.

Safety Symbols and terms related to safety appear in the General safety summary.

xx TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Preface

Product documentation
The following table lists the user documents for the TG8000 and its related
modules:

Table i: TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator documentation


Availability
Document Tektronix Part Number Description Print Web CD
User Manual 071-3036-xx (English) Describes how to install, operate, and
071-3037-xx (Japanese) configure the instrument
071-3038-xx (Russian)
PC Tools Technical Reference 077-0684-xx Describes how to use the PC tools software
that is supplied with the instrument
Specifications and 077-0685-xx Lists the product specifications and
Performance Verification provides procedures for verifying the
performance of the instrument
Programmer Manual 077-0686-xx Provides programming information for the
mainframe and related modules
Service Manual 077-0687-xx Describes how to service the mainframe to
the module level (such as circuit boards
and fuses) and provides information about
servicing generator modules
Declassification and Security 077-0688-xx Describes how to clear or sanitize the data
Instructions storage (memory) devices in the product
for customers with data security concerns.
Release Notes 077-0689-xx Describes the new features, improvements,
and limitations of the instrument firmware
Video Sync Pulse Generator 077-0563-xx Provides information for system
and Electronic Changeover integrators who are designing systems for
Unit System Integration high-definition (HD) and standard-definition
Technical Reference (SD) digital video content where Tektronix
electronic changeover units and video
sync pulse generators are to be deployed.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual xxi


Preface

xxii TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Service basics
Service introduction
This manual contains information needed to safely and effectively service the
TG8000 mainframe and installed modules.
If the instrument does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

To prevent personal injury or damage to the mainframe or modules, consider the


following before attempting service:
The procedures in this manual should be performed only by a qualified service
person.
Read the General safety summary (See page xiv.) and the Service safety
summary (See page xvi.).
When using this manual for servicing, be sure to follow all warnings, cautions,
and notes.

Performance check interval


Generally, the performance check described in the TG8000 Specifications and
Performance Verification Technical Reference manual should be done every
12 months. In addition, a performance check is recommended after repair.
If the TG8000 mainframe or any installed product modules do not meet
performance criteria, repair is necessary.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–1


Service introduction

Strategy for servicing


Throughout this manual, the term module appears, referring to any
field-replaceable component or assembly. References to a module are different
than references to a product module such as “AGL7 module” which is a product
installed in the TG8000 mainframe.
This manual contains all the information needed for periodic maintenance of
the TG8000 mainframe and installed product modules. (Examples of such
information are procedures for performing adjustments.)
Further, the manual contains information for corrective maintenance down to
the module level. To isolate a failure, use the fault isolation procedures found
in the troubleshooting sections for the mainframe and product modules. To
remove and replace any failed module, follow the instructions in the removal
procedure sections for the mainframe and product modules. After isolating a
faulty module, replace it with a fully-tested module obtained from the factory. Use
the replaceable parts list sections for the mainframe and product modules for part
numbers and ordering information for all replaceable modules.

Tektronix service offerings


Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty and other services that
may provide a cost-effective answer to your service needs.
Whether providing warranty repair service or any of the other services listed
below, Tektronix service technicians are well trained to service the TG8000
generator. They have access to the latest information on improvements to the
TG8000 and the latest new options.

Warranty repair service Tektronix warrants this product for one year from date of purchase. The warranty
appears after the title page in this manual. Tektronix technicians provide warranty
service at most Tektronix service locations. The Tektronix product catalog lists all
worldwide service locations or you can visit our Web site for service information:
www.tektronix.com.

Self service Tektronix supports repair to the module level by providing module exchange.

Module exchange. This service reduces downtime for repair by allowing you to
exchange most modules for remanufactured ones. Each module comes with a
90-day service warranty.

For more information. Contact your local Tektronix service center or sales
engineer for more information on any of the repair or adjustment services just
described.

1–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Service introduction

Module compatibility between the TG8000 and TG700 mainframes


Each of the modules that was designed to operate in the Tektronix TG700 TV
Signal Generator Platform will also operate in the TG8000 mainframe.

GPS7 module. The adjustment of the mainframe oscillator depends on the


mainframe in which the GPS7 module is installed:
TG8000 mainframe: You need to set only the internal frequency of the
mainframe oscillator. (See page 2-2, Mainframe clock adjustment.)
TG700 mainframe: You need to set the internal frequency of the mainframe
oscillator and characterize the mainframe oscillator frequency as a function of
voltage. Refer to the TG700 User Manual for more information (Tektronix
part number 071-1970-XX).

SDI7 module. The behavior of the Moving Picture function depends on the
mainframe in which the SDI7 module is installed:
TG8000 mainframe: When Moving Picture is enabled, the circle and text
overlays remain static regardless of the signal type (standard test signal or
“frame (.BMP) picture”). However, the logo overlay remains static for only
standard test signals but continues to move when used with a “frame (.BMP)
picture.”
TG700 mainframe: When Moving Picture is enabled, the circle and text
overlays remain static and the logo overlay moves regardless of the signal
type (standard test signal or “frame (.BMP) picture”).

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–3


Product maintenance

Product maintenance
The following information applies to the TG8000 mainframe and all of its
associated generators and modules. Before you perform maintenance procedures
on the product, read the following information in this section:
Service preparation (See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal (See page 1-10.)
Repackaging instructions (See page 1-16.)
If the instrument does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Service preparation
Read and follow these preparation instructions before attempting to perform any
maintenance or service to the instrument.

Servicing prerequisites Ensure the following before beginning any instrument service:
The maintenance or service of this instrument must be performed by qualified
service personnel only.
Read the General safety summary and the Service safety summary located at
the beginning of this manual before attempting to perform any maintenance
or service to the instrument.

1–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Product maintenance

Electrostatic damage This instrument contains electrical components that are susceptible to damage
prevention from electrostatic discharge. Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are common in
unprotected environments.

CAUTION. Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this


instrument.

Observe the following precautions to avoid static damage:


Minimize handling of static-sensitive components.
Transport and store static-sensitive components or assemblies in their original
containers, on a metal rail, or on conductive foam. Label any package that
contains static-sensitive assemblies or components.
Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a wrist strap
while handling these components. Servicing static-sensitive assemblies or
components should only be performed at a static-free workstation by qualified
personnel.
Nothing capable of generating or holding a static charge should be allowed
on the workstation surface.
Keep the component leads shorted together whenever possible.
Pick up components by the body, never by the leads.
Do not slide the components over any surface.
Avoid handling components in areas that have a floor or work surface covering
capable of generating a static charge.
Do not remove the module circuit board assembly from the shield. The
shield is an important stiffener which prevents damage to surface-mount
components.
Use a soldering iron that is connected to earth ground.
Use only special antistatic, suction-type or wick-type desoldering tools.

NOTE. Some modules and circuit boards in this instrument are RoHS compliant
and others are not. It is recommended that only lead-free solder such as SAC 305
be used for making repairs in this instrument.
Cleaning of rosin residue is not recommended. Most cleaning solvents tend to
reactivate the rosin and spread it under components where it may cause corrosion
under humid conditions. The rosin residue, if left alone, does not exhibit these
corrosive properties.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–5


Product maintenance

Inspection and cleaning


This section describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how to clean
the exterior and interior of the instrument. Inspection and cleaning should be
performed as preventive maintenance, which when done regularly, may prevent
the instrument from malfunctioning and enhance its reliability.
Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the
instrument and using general care when operating it.
How often preventive maintenance should be performed depends on the severity
of the environment in which the instrument is used. A proper time to perform
preventive maintenance is just before making any product adjustments.

General care The top cover helps keep dust out of the instrument, and is needed to meet EMI
and cooling requirements. The top cover should be in place when the instrument
is in operation.

Inspection and cleaning Inspect and clean the instrument as often as operating conditions require.
procedures The collection of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat and
breakdown. (Dirt acts like an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat
dissipation.) Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that could cause a
hardware failure, especially under high-humidity conditions.

CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the
plastics used in this instrument. Use only deionized water when cleaning the
menu buttons or front-panel buttons. Use an ethyl alcohol solution as a cleaner
and rinse with deionized water.

1–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Product maintenance

Inspection – exterior. Inspect the outside of the instrument for damage, wear, and
missing parts, using the following table as a guide. An instrument that appears to
have been dropped or otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify
correct operation and performance. Immediately repair defects that could cause
personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument.

Table 1-1: External inspection checklist


Item Inspect for Repair action
Cabinet, front panel, and Cracks, scratches, Repair or replace defective
cover deformations, damaged module.
hardware or gaskets.
Front-panel buttons Missing or damaged Repair or replace missing or
buttons. defective buttons.
Connectors Broken shells, cracked Repair or replace defective
insulation, and deformed modules. Clear or wash out
contacts. Dirt in connectors. dirt.
Accessories Missing items or parts of Repair or replace damaged
items, bent pins, broken or or missing items, frayed
frayed cables, and damaged cables, and defective
connectors. modules.

Cleaning procedure – exterior. To clean the exterior of the instrument, perform


the following steps:
1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the instrument with a lint free cloth.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the LCD display cover, do not use abrasive
cleaners. The cover is made from lexan and is very soft.

2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint-free cloth dampened in a general purpose


detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Clean the light filter protecting the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth
dampened with a gentle, general purpose detergent-and-water solution.

CAUTION. To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external


cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–7


Product maintenance

Inspection – interior. To access the inside of the instrument for inspection and
cleaning, refer to the Removal and installation procedures in this section.
Inspect the internal portions of the instrument for damage and wear, using the
table as a guide. Any defects that are found should be repaired immediately.

CAUTION. To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure that circuit boards
and components are dry before applying power to the instrument.

Table 1-2: Internal inspection checklist


Item Inspect for Repair action
Circuit boards Loose, broken, or corroded Remove failed module and
solder connections. replace with a fresh module.
Burned circuit boards.
Burned, broken, or cracked
circuit-run plating.
Resistors Burned, cracked, broken, Remove failed module and
blistered condition. replace with a fresh module.
Solder connections Cold solder or rosin joints. Resolder joint and clean
with isopropyl alcohol.
Capacitors Damaged or leaking cases. Remove damaged module
Corroded solder on leads or and replace with a fresh
terminals. module from the factory.
Semiconductors Loosely inserted in sockets. Firmly seat loose
Distorted pins. semiconductors. Remove
devices that have distorted
pins. Carefully straighten
pins (as required to fit the
socket), using long-nose
pliers, and reinsert firmly.
Ensure that straightening
action does not crack pins,
causing them to break off.
Wiring and cables Loose plugs or connectors. Firmly seat connectors.
Burned, broken, or frayed Repair or replace modules
wiring. with defective wires or
cables.
Chassis Dents, deformations, and Straighten, repair, or replace
damaged hardware. defective hardware.

1–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Product maintenance

Cleaning procedure – interior. To clean the interior of the instrument, perform


the following steps:
1. Blow off dust with dry, low-pressure, deionized air (approximately 9 psi).
2. Remove any remaining dust with a lint-free cloth dampened in ethyl alcohol
and rinse with warm deionized water. (A cotton-tipped applicator is useful for
cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards.)

NOTE. If, after performing steps 1 and 2, a module is clean upon inspection,
skip the remaining steps.

3. If steps 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt, the instrument may be spray
washed using a solution of ethyl alcohol by performing steps 4 through 8.
4. Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible shields
and panels. (Refer to the appropriate module remove and replace procedures
for instructions).
5. Spray wash dirty parts with the ethyl alcohol and wait 60 seconds for the
majority of the alcohol to evaporate.
6. Use hot deionized water to thoroughly rinse them.
7. Dry all parts with low-pressure, deionized air.
8. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment using
low-temperature circulating air.

Lubrication. There is no periodic lubrication required for the TG8000.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–9


Module installation and removal

Module installation and removal


The following procedures describe how to install and remove generator, genlock,
and GPS modules from the TG8000 mainframe. A screwdriver with a #1 Phillips
tip is the only tool you need to install or remove a module.

CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage components on the module


and mainframe. To prevent ESD or other component damage, follow the service
preparation guidelines when installing, removing or handling a module. (See
page 1-4, Service preparation.)
To make module removal easier, attach terminations or BNC cables to the module
connectors. The connectors may be damaged if too much force is applied during
module removal.

1–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Module installation and removal

To install a module
To install a module into an empty slot in the mainframe, perform the following
procedure:
1. Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the rear panel of the
mainframe.
2. Use the following guidelines to select the slot where you will install the
module. The following figure shows a sample module configuration with
the associated slot numbers.
For AGL7 and GPS7 modules, only one of these modules can be installed
in the TG8000 mainframe at a time, and it must be installed only in slot 1.
All other modules may be installed in any slot location.

NOTE. When installing a GPS7 module into an existing TG8000 mainframe,


it is suggested that you calibrate the mainframe oscillator oven as part of
the installation and qualification process. (See page 2-2, Mainframe clock
adjustment.)
Although the GPS7 module will operate only in slot 1, you can use the GPS7
module to test diagnostics in each of the four mainframe slots. Refer to the
TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical Reference
manual for more information.

For the AG7, ATG7, AVG7, AWVG7, BG7, DVG7, HD3G7, HDLG7,
HDVG7, and SDI7 modules, up to four of the modules can be installed
in the TG8000 mainframe.
The TG8000 Power Supply module is user replaceable and must be
installed only in the position shown in the following figure. The TG8000
Power Supply module cannot be installed in a TG700 mainframe.

Figure 1-1: TG8000 slot numbering

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–11


Module installation and removal

3. Use a screwdriver with a #1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws of the blank
panel attached to the slot you want to use, and then pull it away from the
instrument. Save the blank panel for future use. (See Figure 1-2.)
If you are installing a new module into a slot that already contains a module,
remove the existing module. (See page 1-14, To remove a module.)

Figure 1-2: Removing the blank panel

CAUTION. Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module
when you insert the module into the mainframe.

1–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Module installation and removal

4. Insert the module into the slot, paying attention to the module orientation.
(See Figure 1-3.) Push the module into the slot until the connector board of
the module is firmly engaged with the Main board of the mainframe.

Figure 1-3: Installing a module


5. Tighten the two screws to secure the module to the mainframe. (See
Figure 1-4.)

Figure 1-4: Securing a module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–13


Module installation and removal

To remove a module
To remove a module from the mainframe, perform the following procedure:

CAUTION. To facilitate module removal, attach terminations or BNC cables to the


module connectors. The connector may be damaged if too much force is applied
to it during module removal.

1. Unplug the power cord from the power connector on the mainframe rear panel.
2. For all modules except the Power Supply module, attach 75 Ω terminations or
BNC cables to the BNC connectors on the module to be removed. Module
removal becomes easier if the terminations or cables are attached to the
connectors at the left and right ends. For the Power Supply module, you
will use the loop handle to remove the module after you loosen the module
in the next step.
3. Use a screwdriver with a #1 Phillips tip to loosen the two screws securing
the module to the mainframe.

CAUTION. Be careful not to damage the parts and cables inside of the module
when you remove the module from the mainframe.

4. Pull the module slowly toward you while supporting the terminations or BNC
cables attached to the connectors. (See Figure 1-5.) For the Power Supply
module, use the loop handle to remove the module.

1–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Module installation and removal

Figure 1-5: Removing a module


5. If this empty slot will not be used, you must attach a blank panel to the
mainframe to control instrument cooling and EMI emissions.
a. Align the blank panel with the open slot of the mainframe.
b. Tighten the two screws to secure the blank panel to the mainframe.

NOTE. A blank panel is available as an optional accessory for the


TG8000 mainframe.

6. If you want to install another module into the slot from which the module is
removed, perform To install a Module starting at step 4. (See page 1-11.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 1–15


Repacking instructions

Repacking instructions
Use the following instructions to prepare your instrument for shipment to a
Tektronix, Inc., Service Center:
1. Attach a tag to the instrument showing: the owner, complete address and
phone number of someone at your firm who can be contacted, the instrument
serial number, and a description of the required service.
2. Package the instrument in the original packaging materials. If the original
packaging materials are not available, follow these directions:
a. Obtain a carton of corrugated cardboard having inside dimensions six or
more inches greater than the dimensions of the instrument. Use a shipping
carton that has a test strength of at least 250 pounds (113.5 kg).
b. Surround the module with a protective (anti-static) bag.
c. Pack dunnage or urethane form between the instrument and the carton.
If using Styrofoam kernels, overfill the box and compress the kernels by
closing the lid. There should be three inches of tightly packed cushioning
on all sides of the instrument.
3. Seal the carton with shipping tape, industrial stapler, or both.

1–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


TG8000 mainframe
Mainframe service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the TG8000 mainframe. Service information for each of the
available generator, genlock, or GPS modules follows this section.

Before servicing the Before servicing this instrument, review the following information:
mainframe Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument. (See
page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

Mainframe service The service information for the TG8000 mainframe is divided into the following
information subsections:
Mainframe clock adjustment addresses after repair adjustment and the interval
between periodic adjustments. It contains a procedure for adjusting the master
clock frequency of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-2.)

Mainframe theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module or


block level. (See page 2-7.)
Mainframe diagrams contains a block diagram using individual modules
as blocks and an interconnect diagram showing connections between the
modules. (See page 2-9.)
Mainframe troubleshooting contains information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. Included are instructions for operating
the TG8000 internal diagnostic routines and troubleshooting trees. (See
page 2-10, Mainframe troubleshooting.)
Mainframe removal and installation procedures contains procedures for the
removal of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules.
(See page 2-19.)
Mainframe replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules in
the TG8000 mainframe by part number. (See page 2-35.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–1


Mainframe clock adjustment

Mainframe clock adjustment


The only adjustment in the TG8000 mainframe is for the frequency of the master
clock oscillator.
There are two methods for adjusting the frequency of the master clock. You can
use a frequency signal generator or you can use a GPS7 module by locking the
master clock to a GPS signal. Procedures for both methods are provided below.

NOTE. If your TG8000 generator has a GPS7 module installed, you need to use
the GPS7 module to adjust the master clock frequency. When you use the GPS7
module to adjust the master clock, you can adjust the clock while the instrument is
in operation, which avoids any system downtime or any warm-up period.

Requirements for adjustment


Before proceeding, note the following requirement.

Warm-up period The instrument requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance. In addition, the signal
generator requires appropriate warm-up time to meet the frequency accuracy.
If you are using a GPS7 module to adjust the master clock, an external antenna or
GPS signal must be connected during the warm-up period.

To adjust the master clock using a frequency signal generator


Use this procedure to adjust the frequency of the mainframe master clock if you
do not have a GPS7 module.

Required equipment The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the master clock
frequency using a frequency signal generator.

Table 2-1: Equipment required to adjust the master clock using a signal generator
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
Analog genlock module 1 Tektronix AGL7 module
Frequency standard 1 Frequency: 10 MHz ±1×10–9 Tektronix GPS7 locked to GPS or
Amplitude: 8 dBm equivalent
Spectracom/Pendulum 6689
75 Ω BNC cable 1 Length: 42 inches Tektronix part number 012-0074-00

2–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe clock adjustment

Procedure Perform the following procedure to adjust the master clock frequency using
a frequency standard.
1. Set the output of the frequency standard as follows:
Frequency: 10.000000 MHz
Output level: 8 dBm
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the CW connector on the AGL7 Genlock
module to the output of the frequency standard as shown in the following
figure.

NOTE. You can use a Tektronix TG700 or TG8000 signal generator with a GPS7
module installed to produce the 10 MHz frequency standard.
In this case, ensure that the GPS7 module is locked to a GPS signal in fine mode.
Configure the Black 3 output of the GPS7 module to output a 10 MHz sine wave.
Connect the GPS7 module Black 3 output to the CW input on the AGL7 module of
the TG8000 you are testing.

Figure 2-1: Equipment connection for adjusting the master clock frequency using a frequency standard
3. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
4. Let the instrument warm up for 20 minutes before proceeding.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–3


Mainframe clock adjustment

5. Set the genlock source to CW of the AGL7 Genlock module as follows:


a. Press the MODULE button to display the AGL7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GENLOCK, and
then press the ENTER button to access the GENLOCK submenu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CW, and then press
the ENTER button.
d. Press the BACK button to return to the AGL7 main menu.
6. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 : PRESET is displayed.
7. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select UTILITY, and then
press the ENTER button to access the UTILITY submenu.
8. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CAL OVEN : SELECT,
and then press the ENTER button.
9. A message will be displayed asking you to verify that you want to execute the
calibration. Press the ENTER button to proceed with the calibration.
10. Verify that the message CALIBRATION result = xxxxxxx is displayed.
The result should be seven characters near the value of 2,097,152. Press the
ENTER button to exit the calibration mode.
11. Verify the calibration:
a. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 : PRESET is displayed.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select UTILITY, and then
press the ENTER button to access the UTILITY submenu.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS,
and then press the ENTER button to access the DIAGNOSTICS submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS :
CAL.
e. Check that the CAL value is less than 2.5 e-6.

NOTE. If the CAL value is greater than 2.6 e-6, then the oscillator oven may need
to be serviced.

2–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe clock adjustment

To adjust the master clock using an installed GPS7 module


Use this procedure to adjust the frequency of the mainframe master clock when
you have a GPS7 module installed in the mainframe you are testing. When
you use the GPS7 module to adjust the master clock, you can adjust the clock
while the instrument is in operation, which avoids any system downtime or any
warm-up period.

Required equipment The following table lists the equipment required to perform the master clock
adjustment using the GPS7 module.

Table 2-2: Equipment required to adjust the master clock using a GPS7 module
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
with GPS capability Tektronix GPS7
GPS antenna feed with good 1 Less than 5 dB attenuation since last Trimble Bullet III, 5v, 35 dB gain,
signal level amplifier antenna with F-connector, or equivalent.
Cable: up to 200 ft Belden 1694A, or
equivalent, with an F connector on one
end and a BNC connector on the other
end.

Procedure Perform the following procedure to set the internal frequency of the mainframe
internal oscillator. This adjustment stores the current frequency of the oscillator
while it is locked to a GPS or a reference signal, to be used when in Internal
mode. It can be done without any disruption to operation and is best done in the
operating environment of the instrument.
1. Verify that the instrument has warmed up for a minimum of 20 minutes, with
the external antenna or GPS signal connected.
2. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 : STATUS appears.
3. Check that the signal status shows Locked.
4. Check that signal lock indicator displays Fine:
a. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Press the ENTER button.
c. Press the right (►) arrow button to select TUNE.
d. Check that Fine is showing on the right side of the LCD display.
5. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 : PRESET appears.
6. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select UTILITY, and then
press the ENTER button to access the UTILITY submenu.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–5


Mainframe clock adjustment

7. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CAL OVEN : SELECT,
and then press the ENTER button.
8. A message will be displayed asking you to verify that you want to execute the
calibration. Press the ENTER button to proceed with the calibration.
9. Verify that the message CALIBRATION result = xxxxxxx is displayed.
The result should be seven characters near the value of 2,097,152. Press the
ENTER button to exit the calibration mode.
10. Verify the calibration:
a. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 : PRESET appears.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select UTILITY, and then
press the ENTER button to access the UTILITY submenu.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS,
and then press the ENTER button to access the DIAGNOSTICS submenu.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS :
CAL.
e. Check that the CAL value is less than 2.5 e-6.

NOTE. If the CAL value is greater than 2.6 e-6, then the oscillator oven may need
to be serviced.

2–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe theory of operation

Mainframe theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks or modules
in the TG8000.
To see diagrams that show the relationship between the major circuit blocks and
how the modules interconnect, refer to the Diagrams section. (See page 2-9.)

Main board
The Main board consists of the following seven blocks.

Processor core The processor core consists of the CPU and all of its support circuits such as flash
memory, DDR memory, clocks, buffers, reset circuit, configuration memory,
and decoder PLD.
The CPU controls the front panel, LCD display, USB port, network interface, GPI
interface, and installed modules. The CPU also controls execution of remote
commands and downloading and uploading of signal files through the Ethernet
interface.
The flash memory holds the firmware data and signal data used to generate outputs
from some modules. During Genlock or GPS referenced operation, the CPU reads
data from the input module, and controls the frequency of the secondary clocks.

Ovenized oscillator The ovenized oscillator provides the stable timebase for generating signals. This
is a fixed 20 MHz and is not adjustable.

Video / Audio clocks The synthesizer creates the video and audio clocks from the oven output. The
video clocks are a 54 MHz master clock signal and HD rate clocks of 74.25 MHz
and a 74.25/1.001 MHz. The audio clock is 12.288 MHz. The CPU can control
the ratio between the oven and these clocks. By controlling this ratio, the system
can lock to external signals for Genlock or GPS reference. The ratio is also
adjusted to achieve calibration, with the resulting value stored in flash memory.
The 54 MHz and the 12.288 MHz are delivered to each slot. For the HD rate
clocks, the CPU controls four multiplexers that independently allow each slot to
get either the 74.25 MHz or 74.25/1.001 MHz clock. The diagnostics monitor that
each clock is correctly locked to the oven or master 54 MHz clock.

Frame pulse generator The frame pulse generator uses the 54 MHz clock to generate the three frame
pulses at 2.997 Hz, 6.25 Hz, and 3.00 Hz that are used to synchronize the signal
formats generated by the installed modules.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–7


Mainframe theory of operation

Slot connectors Each slot connector provides the interface between the TG8000 mainframe and an
installed module. The slot connector provides CPU related signals such as data bus
and address bus, clock signals, power, and other control signals to the modules.

DC/DC converters This block converts the +5 V supplied by the Power Supply module to –5 V,
3.3 V, 8 V, and 5 V analog for use by the Main board and the slots. Various
voltages needed only on the Main board, such as to drive the DDR and processor
core, are also provided.
The high current 5 V and 3.3 V voltages supplied to the slots are fused at each
slot. All of the major voltages, including both sides of each fuse, are monitored by
the voltage diagnostic.

Network interface This block controls the Ethernet interface. The 10/100/1000 BASE-T port is
located on the rear panel of the Power Supply module.

GPI interface The GPI interface allows the CPU block to access the user inputs and outputs via
the GPI port located on the rear panel of the Power Supply module.

Power Supply module


The Power Supply module contains the AC/DC power supply that derives the
+5 V supply voltage from the AC line and supplies it to the Main board.
The Fan board senses the air temperature and adjusts the fan speed, and houses
the rear panel connectors for the Network and GPI signals.
The Power Adapter board passes the signals from the other parts of the Power
Supply module and contains a nonvolatile memory device for logging the usage
hours of the Power Supply module.

2–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe diagram

Mainframe diagram
This section contains the Block diagram of the TG8000 mainframe. The block
diagram shows the modules and functional blocks in the instrument.

Figure 2-2: TG8000 block diagram

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–9


Mainframe troubleshooting

Mainframe troubleshooting
This section contains information about how to troubleshoot instrument problems
in order to isolate faulty modules in the TG8000 mainframe.

Diagnostics and performance checks


Before attempting to troubleshoot an instrument problem, it is recommended that
you perform the performance verification procedures for the TG8000 mainframe
and all installed modules. (See the TG8000 Specifications and Performance
Verification Technical Reference manual.)
Included in the performance verification procedures are instructions for running
and viewing the TG8000 internal diagnostics. The diagnostics include the
following:
Readouts of mainframe tests including power-on diagnostics, clock
frequencies, temperatures, Main board and slot voltages, and fan speed
Read/write tests for the signal memory of the following modules: HDVG7,
DVG7, and BG7 with Option CB
Module-specific diagnostics for the following modules: GPS7, HD3G7, and
SDI7
Slot diagnostics to test the power supply and signal connections on the Main
board IO slot connectors (requires a GPS7 module)

CAUTION. After you execute the diagnostics, you will need to cycle power on
the instrument. If you have not saved the instrument settings, be sure to save
the current instrument settings to a preset, and then recall the settings after the
diagnostic tests are completed.

If the message Fail: "a module name" Diag error is displayed, replace the
module.

2–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe troubleshooting

Oscillator calibration The diagnostic readouts in the UTILITY menu include readouts for Tune and Cal,
which are related to the oscillator calibration as described below:
Tune. The Tune readout indicates how far the system is being pulled from the
calibrated internal frequency value in order to lock to an external reference.
If you use a GPS7 or AGL7 module to lock to a video source that is 5 parts
per million high, then the tune will say +5e-6. Notice that this allows one
to actually measure the frequency of the reference input, and to see if the
input is near the end of the available tuning range. If the system is in internal
mode the tune value should be 0.00 e-6 and the integer values will equal
the calibration value.
The integer values indicates the actual tuning control word. The allowed range
of this tuning word is 0 to 4,194,304. The first number is the actual value at
the present time, the second value is the target value for the control loop. In
most cases these two values are the same, but in the case when system needs
to make a large frequency change, then depending on instrument mode the
value may slew slowly to the target value to stay inside the allowed slew rate
for reference systems. In this case the first value will slew over seconds or
minutes until it equals the second value. If the instrument is taking a long time
to lock this display may provide valuable information about what is happening.
One value of the Tune diagnostic readout is to see if the instrument needs
to be calibrated. If the instrument is locked to a traceable reference, then
any tune value indicates error in the instrument calibration. For example, if
the instrument is locked to GPS and the Tune is more that 0.1 e-6, then you
should consider calibrating the internal frequency of the instrument. This
can be done in service with no disruption to the operation. See the TG8000
User Manual for instructions.
Cal. The Cal readout value represents the correction applied to the oven
oscillator clock to make the internal mode frequency be calibrated. The
integer value is the tuning control word to make this happen, and the
“0.59e-6” is the fractional correction being applied, in the example case this
is 0.59 parts in 1 million. When the instrument calibrated is performed, this
number will typically change.
Over the life of the oven, the expected drift is +-2.5 e -6, so this number should
always be in this range. If the number is not in this range, then the instrument
may have been miscalibrated or the oven may have drifted out of spec. See
the TG8000 User Manual for instructions.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–11


Mainframe troubleshooting

I/O slot tests Run this test to verify that each TG8000 module slot is functioning. You will need
a GPS7 Synchronization and Timecode module to perform this test.
1. Install the GPS7 module into slot 1 of the TG8000 mainframe.
2. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
3. Run the GPS7 diagnostics as follows:
a. Press MODULE to display the GPS7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select DIAGNOSTICS, and then press
ENTER.
c. Press the up (▲) arrow button to select IO test.
d. Press ENTER to run the test.
4. If a failure occurs, record the error code(s) and refer to the error code table.
(See Table 2-3.)
5. Disconnect power from the TG8000.
6. Move the GPS7 module to an untested slot and repeat steps 2 through 6
until all slots have been tested.

2–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe troubleshooting

Slot diagnostics error codes. The following table lists the error codes that may
appear when running the slot diagnostics using a GPS7 module:

Table 2-3: Slot diagnostics error codes


Error
code Description Troubleshooting actions
CS6/Data bus test
0x1 1 Read-back of both bytes fails on every Indicates that there is an issue with the address bus, data bus, CS6_N,
write/read WAIT_N, any of the write/read control signals (RD_N, R_W_N, WEN0,
WEN1) or CKIO (54 MHz bus clock). The HW uses all available
control signals when decoding the CPU accesses in order to test
connectivity/functionality.
Note that MWAIT* should pulse low during these tests. The HW waits 24
CPU clocks before sending the data on reads in order to test the WAIT_N
signal (CPU accesses to GPS7 are normally wait-stated by the GPS7CPLD
to ~32 CPU clocks). If WAIT_N is not connected to the slot, the read cycles
will end after the default time of 12 clocks and the data will be received
as all zeros.
Note that this test may fail if there is an address bus problem, so the
CS4/Address bus test below may help isolate the issue. But, the address
bus test will fail if there is an issue with the data bus, so the results of both
tests must be carefully weighed. Probing the address and data signals
along with the control signals while the two tests run will show if there is a
stuck at 0 or stuck at 1 issue on a particular bit.
0x1A 1 Read-back of address c800_001C failed Indicates that one or more bus control signals are stuck low. Check the
console to determine the value read back to determine which signal has
an issue. Also, use the test points on the GPS7 module to verify that the
control signals toggle during the IO slot tests. (See Figure 2-3.)
0x2 1 Read-back of upper byte is correct, but Only the lower byte of the data bus is failing which means that there is
lower byte fails on every write/read an issue with WEN0 or slot data [7:0]. The address bus and other control
signals are most likely OK. If some of the write/read combinations work,
then the issue is with slot data[7:0] (not WEN0).
0x3 1 Read-back of lower byte is correct, but Only the upper byte of the data bus is failing which means that there is an
upper byte fails on every write/read issue with WEN1 or slot data [15:8]. The address bus and other control
signals are most likely OK. If some of the write/read combinations work,
then the issue is with slot data[15:8] (not WEN1).
0x4 1 Walking zeros test failed This indicates that there is a data bus short or open.
0x5 1 Walking ones test failed This indicates that there is a data bus short or open.
CS4/Data bus test
0x6, 1 0x6 indicates that the address walking If error code 0x8 is also present, then the CS4* signal is likely open or
0x7 1 zeros test failed shorted. If error code 0x8 is not present, then there is a short or open on
0x7 indicates that the address walking one or more address lines. Note that the HW registers the address lines for
ones address test failed writes to CS4* space - 0xC800:0012 contains AD[16:1], and 0xC800:0014
contains AD[25:17].
0x8 1 The address walking zeros and ones This likely means that the CS4* signal is open or shorted. This could also
tests failed completely mean that chip select 6 (CS6x*) is stuck low.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–13


Mainframe troubleshooting

Table 2-3: Slot diagnostics error codes (cont.)


Error
code Description Troubleshooting actions
ACLK/MCLK test
0x9 MCLK test failed If the value read from the MCLK count register is 0x0, then MCLK is most
likely stuck in a high or low state (short or open). If the value received
is < than 0x100, then there is an issue with the MCLK frequency or an
intermittent connection on MCLK.
0xA ACLK test failed If the value read from the ACLK count register is 0x0, then ACLK is most
likely stuck in a high or low state (short or open). If the value received is <
than 0x71, then there is an intermittent connection or frequency issue with
the ACLK or MCLK.
Frame0/Video clock tests
0xBC An issue with the Frame0 signal and/or This test checks the Frame0 signal, 54 MHz clock and 74.176 MHz clock.
the 74.176 MHz clock and the 54 MHz
clock
0xB, 0xB indicates there is an issue with the Either the clock is not getting to the slot or the frequency is wrong (this could
0xC 54 MHz clock be an issue with the 74.xx MHz clock mux).
0xC indicates there is an issue with the
74.176 MHz clock.
Frame1/Video clock tests
0xDE An issue with the Frame1 signal and/or This test checks the Frame1 signal, 54 MHz clock and 74.25 MHz clock.
both the 74.25 MHz clock and the 54
MHz clock
0xD, 0xD indicates there is an issue with the Either the clock is not getting to the slot or the frequency is wrong (this could
0xE 54 MHz clock be an issue with the 74.xx MHz clock mux).
0xE indicates there is an issue with the
74.25 MHz clock
Frame2/Video clock test
0xF An issue with the Frame2 signal This test checks the Frame2 signal and the 54 MHz clock. If error code 0xF
is generated, then there is most likely an issue with the Frame2 signal. The
54 MHz clock could be at fault, but this would likely have been indicated by
failures in the earlier tests (error codes 0xB or 0xD).
Frame_Out test
0x10 The wrong number of pulses was In this test, the GPS7’s DO_FPGA toggles the FRAME_OUT signal low to
detected high 127 (0x7F) times. The Frame FPGA on the mainboard counts number
of high going pulses it receives on FRAME_OUT.
If the number is zero, there is likely an open circuit between the slot
connector and the Frame FPGA on the FRAME_OUT signal.

2–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe troubleshooting

Table 2-3: Slot diagnostics error codes (cont.)


Error
code Description Troubleshooting actions
Voltage monitor tests
0x11 +5 V is out of range at the IO connector Check the fuse on the Main board and trace the voltage back to the DC-DC
converter.
0x12 +8 V is out of range at the IO connector Check the fuse on the Main board and trace the voltage back to the DC-DC
converter.
0x13 +3.3 V or the -5 VA (or both) is out of This error code is generated when -5 V relative to +3.3V is out of range.
range at the IO connector Measure the two voltages to determine which is out of range. Check
the fuses on the Main board and trace the voltages back to the DC-DC
converters.
IRQ test
0x14, IRQ signal (Sx_IRQ_N) test failed This test only reads a status register in the GPS7 PLD that is tied to 0x0001.
0x15 If error code 0x15 occurs, it means that the read failed. The Sx_IRQ_N
signal should be tested via JTAG.
Misc.
0x99 One or more of the FPGA or PLD images The minimum required versions are: mainframe frame FPGA (v0.14+),
required to run the IO test process is GPS7 PLD (v1.7+) and GPS7 DOFPGA (v33+). The detected and
incorrect (out of date) expected version numbers are printed to the console when this error code
is generated.
1 If the data bus or address bus tests fail (error codes 0x1 – 0x8), check that all power supplies are making it through the slot connector to the GPS7. The voltage
monitor tests are run after the data bus and address bus tests because the voltage monitor results are not meaningful if the data bus or address bus is not
working properly; so, the voltages must be manually checked if the data bus or address bus tests are failing.

Figure 2-3: Slot diagnostics test points on the GPS7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–15


Mainframe troubleshooting

Mainframe troubleshooting
The following table lists some common problems with the instrument and how
to troubleshoot them.

Table 2-4: Mainframe troubleshooting procedures


Problem Troubleshooting steps
No power or lights Check the main power supply as follows:
1. Remove instrument top cover.
2. Apply AC power.
3. Use a voltmeter to check the voltage on TP21 / Fuse F1. Note that TP21 is unlabeled, but is
located just to the left of Fuse F1. (See Figure 2-4 on page 2-18.)
4. If 5 V is not present, replace the Power Supply module.
5. If power is present on TP21, then check fuses F1 and F2. Replace fuses if necessary.
6. If there still no power, replace the Main board.
Instrument will not boot up This could be a software version incompatibility issue. Some versions of software will not work
or even boot up with certain modules installed. To check:
1. Remove all generator modules from the mainframe.
2. Power up the instrument and look for error messages on boot up.
3. After the instrument boots up, check the software version and upgrade to the latest release
if necessary.
4. Reinstall the modules one at a time and watch for start up messages.
Fault LED illuminated All of the conditions that drive the fault light should be displayed in the mainframe diagnostic
screen. To view the diagnostics:
1. Press the MODULE button until "Preset" appears.
2. Press the up arrow to get to Utilities, and then press the Enter button.
3. Press the up arrow to get to Diagnostics, and then press the Enter button.
4. Press the right arrow multiple times to cycle through the following diagnostic status readouts:
Tune indicates how much the Genlock or GPS reference is pulling the box from the Cal
value. If not externally referenced this will be zero.
Cal indicates the correction applied to the oven to calibrate the clocks.
PLL indicate the lock status of the four secondary audio and video clocks - all should
indicate lock by “LK”.
TEMP shows the temperature of two internal sensors, typically 10 to 20 degrees above
the ambient temperature.
The 21 Voltage pages show voltages on various supplies and fuses; all should indicate
“OK”.
The fan speed varies from about 5800 at low temperatures to 12,500 at high temperatures.
5. Repair or replace boards or component as needed to address any issues found.

2–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe troubleshooting

Table 2-4: Mainframe troubleshooting procedures (cont.)


Problem Troubleshooting steps
Fan not working Run diagnostics and check the fan voltage:
If the 5 V for the fan is not present, replace fuse F1 on the Main board or replace the
Main board.
If the 5 V for the fuse is OK, the replace the fan. If that does not fix the problem, then
replace the LAN/Fan board.
Instrument not able to genlock Adjust/check the master clock. (See page 2-2, Mainframe clock adjustment.) After adjustment,
go into the mainframe diagnostics and verify that the CAL value readout is less than ±2.5e–6.
If not then replace the oven or the Main board.
In Factory mode, run the PLL Range Check from the mainframe diagnostics (perform the
common diagnostic tests in the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical
Reference manual. Verify that all the secondary clocks can tune at least ±90e -6. If not,
then replace the Main board.
Display problems On power up, the LCD display should initially be dark but have a visible set of black squares on
the top row. After a second or two, the LCD backlight should come on and a booting message
should appear. If the backlight does not come on, check fuse F700 on the Main board, and
then replace the display. If the text is not there, replace the display, then the cable, and finally
the Main board if necessary.
Keyboard/front panel problems On power up, the front panel buttons and indicators should light up in groups of 3 to 5. This
sequence will repeat about 4 times while waiting for the instrument to boot. The flashing
sequence is controlled by the front panel, only power is required from the Main board. So if
there flashing does not occur then replace the front panel.
Note that the new front panel will not flash until the mainframe software has fully booted and
loaded the code into the front panel. After the system has booted, go to the mainframe utilities
and run the keyboard diagnostic to check all the keys, if this does not pass, replace the Key
board, then the cable, and if still bad then replace the Main board.
Remote interface problems Use the UTILITY menu to verify that the GPI alarm output is enabled and that the desired
error conditions are also enabled.
Module(s) not working properly Use a GPS7 module to run the I/O slot tests. (See page 2-12, I/O slot tests.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–17


Mainframe troubleshooting

Figure 2-4: Main board (view from top)

2–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Mainframe removal and installation procedures


This subsection contains procedures for removal and installation of almost
all mechanical and electrical modules. Any electrical or mechanical module,
assembly, or part listed in the Replaceable parts list section of this manual is a
module.

Preparation
WARNING. Before performing this or any other procedure in this manual, read the
General safety summary and the Service safety summary found at the beginning
of this manual. Also, to prevent possible damage to the TG8000 components,
read Preventing ESD in this section.

This subsection contains the following items:


Preparatory information that you need to properly perform the procedures
that follow.
List of tools required to remove and disassemble all modules.
Two module locator diagrams for finding the replaceable modules in the
TG8000. (See Figure 2-6.) (See Figure 2-7.)
Procedures for removal and reinstallation of the electrical and mechanical
modules.
A disassembly procedure for removal of all the major modules from the
TG8000 at one time and for reassembly of those modules into the TG8000.
Such a complete disassembly is normally only done when completely
cleaning the TG8000. Instructions for doing the actual cleaning are found
under Inspection and cleaning at the beginning of this section. (See page 1-6.)
Module disassembly procedures.

WARNING. Before performing any procedure in this subsection, disconnect the


power cord from the line voltage source. Failure to do so could cause serious
injury or death.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–19


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

General instructions Read these general instructions before removing a module.


Read Equipment required below for a complete list of the tools you will need to
remove and install modules in the TG8000.
Review the figures on the following pages to locate the replaceable modules
in the instrument.
To remove a module for service, begin by reading the Access procedure. (See
page 2-24.) By following the instructions in that procedure, you can remove
the module to be serviced while removing the minimum number of additional
modules.

Equipment required Many of the modules in the TG8000 can be removed with a screwdriver handle
mounted with a #2 Phillips tip. Use this tool whenever a procedure step instructs
you to remove or install a screw unless a different size screwdriver is specified
in that step.
All equipment required to remove and reinstall each module is listed in the first
step of its procedure.

Table 2-5: Tools required for module removal


Item No. Name Description
1 Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
2 #1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
3 #2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
4 T15 TORX tip TORX-driver bit for T15 size screw heads

2–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

TG8000 orientation In this manual, procedures refer to "front," "rear," "top," etc. of the TG8000. The
following figure shows how the sides are referenced.

Figure 2-5: TG8000 orientation

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–21


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

TG8000 modules The following figures show the location of the replaceable modules in the TG8000
mainframe.

Figure 2-6: Top cover, line cord, and Front Panel assembly

2–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Figure 2-7: Mainframe, Main board, and Power Supply module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–23


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Access procedure
When you have identified the module to be removed for service, read General
instructions. (See page 2-20.) Then use the following table to determine which
procedures to use for removing the module. The removal procedures end with
installation instructions.

If the module is shown in Use these procedures


(See Figure 2-6.) Locking line cord (See page 2-24.)
Top cover (See page 2-25.)
Front Panel removal (See page 2-26.)
Front Panel subassemblies (See page 2-28.)
(See Figure 2-7.) Main board (See page 2-33.)
NOTE. Before performing the Main board, first
remove the locking line cord and top cover using
the procedures listed above.

Power Supply module subassemblies(See


page 2-30.)

Locking line cord


1. Assemble the equipment and locate the line cord: You need no equipment.
Locate the line cord in the locator diagram. (See Figure 2-6.)
2. Orient the instrument: Set the TG8000 so its bottom is down on the work
surface and its rear is facing you.
3. Remove the line cord: Find the line cord on the rear panel. The locking cord
has a release latch on the top that must be pressed to remove the cord. Grasp
the plug, press the release latch, and pull the line cord and clamp away.
4. Reinstallation: Insert the line cord into the power receptacle on the TG8000
rear panel until it latches into place.

Figure 2-8: Removing the locking line cord

2–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Top cover
1. Assemble equipment and locate the top cover:
a. You need a screwdriver with a #1 or #2 Phillips tip (See Table 2-5 on
page 2-20.). Check your instrument to see which tip is correct. Due to a
part change, some instruments require a #1 tip and others require a #2 tip.
b. Locate the top cover in the locator diagram. (See Figure 2-6 on page 2-22.)
2. Orient the instrument: Set the TG8000 so that its bottom is down on the
work surface and its rear is facing you.
3. Remove the top cover:
a. Use a screwdriver with a #1 or #2 Phillips tip (see step 1) to remove the
22 screws securing the top cover to the TG8000 mainframe.
b. Lift the top cover off of the TG8000 mainframe. (See Figure 2-8.)
4. Reinstallation: Perform step 3 in reverse order to reinstall the top cover.
Torque all screws to 5.5 in/lbs.

Figure 2-9: Removing the top cover

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–25


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Front Panel assembly


1. Assemble equipment and locate the Front Panel assembly:
a. You need a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip (See Table 2-5 on
page 2-20.).
b. Locate the Front Panel assembly in the locator diagram. (See Figure 2-6
on page 2-22.)
2. Remove the top cover: (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
3. Orient the instrument: Set the TG8000 so its bottom is down on the work
surface and its front is facing you.
4. Remove the Front Panel assembly: (See Figure 2-10.)

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the USB connector, care must be used when
removing the Front Panel assembly. It is recommended that you remove the
screws from the bottom of the instrument before you turn the instrument over to
remove the side screws. This will prevent the Front Panel assembly from moving
and damaging the USB connector.

a. Set the TG8000 so that its top is down on the work surface and its front is
facing you.
b. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the four screws securing
the Front Panel assembly to the bottom of the mainframe.
c. Turn the TG8000 over so that its bottom is down on the work surface
and its front is facing you.
d. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the two screws securing
the Front Panel assembly to the side of the chassis (one screw on each
side).
e. Unplug the cables at J711 and J725 on the Main board.
f. Grasp the Front Panel assembly and carefully pull it forward over the
USB connector so that you do not damage the connector.
5. Reinstallation: Perform steps 2 through 4 in reverse order to reinstall the
Front Panel assembly. Torque all screws to 5.5 in/lbs.

2–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Figure 2-10: Removing the Front Panel assembly

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–27


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Front Panel subassemblies


1. Assemble equipment and locate the Front Panel assembly:
a. You need a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip and a T15 TORX tip (See
Table 2-5 on page 2-20.).
b. Locate the Front Panel assembly in the locator diagram. (See Figure 2-6
on page 2-22.)
2. Remove the Front Panel assembly: (See page 2-26, Front Panel assembly.)
3. Orient the Front Panel assembly: Set the Front Panel assembly so that you
can access the screws on the back side of the assembly.
4. Remove the front cover: (See Figure 2-11.)

CAUTION. To prevent dirt from being trapped between the LCD display and the
front cover, keep the back of the lexan cover clean while you are disassembling
the Front Panel assembly.

a. Use a screwdriver with a TORX T15 tip to remove the four screws
securing the U-shaped handles to the front cover (two screws on each
side).
b. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the four screws securing
the front cover to the front frame.
c. Grasp the front cover and pull it forward.
5. Remove the Front Panel board and keypad: (See Figure 2-11.)
a. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the four screws
securing the Front Key board to the front frame.
b. Lift the board away.
c. To remove the keypad from the board, carefully pull up on the keypad.
There are eight tails from the keypad that extend through to the back side
of the board.

2–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

6. Remove the LCD module: (See Figure 2-11.)

CAUTION. To prevent dirt from being trapped between the LCD display and the
front cover, keep the LCD display clean while you are disassembling the Front
Panel assembly.

a. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the four screws securing
the LCD module to the front frame.
b. Lift the board away.
7. Remove any remaining components: If necessary, hand disassemble any
remaining components of the Front Panel assembly.
8. Reinstallation: Perform steps 2 through 7 in reverse order to reassemble and
reinstall the Front Panel assembly. Torque all screws to 5.5 in/lbs.

Figure 2-11: Disassembling the Front Panel assembly

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–29


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Power Supply module subassemblies


The Power Supply module includes the following subassemblies:
LAN board
Fan
RFI filter
1. Assemble equipment and locate the module(s) to be removed:
a. You need screwdrivers with #1 and #2 Phillips tips (See Table 2-5 on
page 2-20.).
b. Locate the subassembly to be removed. (See Figure 2-13 on page 2-32.)
2. Remove the Power Supply module: The Power Supply module is removed
from the TG8000 mainframe like any of the generator modules. You can use
the loop handle on the supply for easy removal. (See page 1-14, To remove a
module.)
3. Orient the Power Supply module: Set the Power Supply module so that its
bottom is down on the work surface and the back of the module is facing you.
4. Remove the LAN board: (See Figure 2-13 on page 2-32.)
a. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the two screws securing
the top cover of the Power Supply module to the module chassis (one on
top and one at the back of the module).
b. Lift the cover up and away from the module chassis.
c. Unplug the cable from the fan at J1 on the LAN board.
d. Unplug the ribbon cable from the Power Adapter board at J2 on the LAN
board.
e. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the three screws
securing the LAN board to the module chassis.
f. Lift the LAN board up carefully and unplug the Ethernet cable from JR1
on the bottom of the LAN board.
g. Lift the board up and away from the chassis.
5. Remove the fan: (See Figure 2-13 on page 2-32.)
a. Remove the LAN board (see step 4).
b. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the four screws
securing the fan to the chassis. Two screws are on the rear panel. The
other two screws secure the module handle and are accessed from inside
the module. Note the location of the module handle.

2–30 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

c. Lift the fan up and away from the chassis.


d. If you are replacing the fan, move the fan bracket from the old fan to the
new fan. (See Figure 2-12.)
6. Remove the RFI filter: (See Figure 2-13 on page 2-32.)
a. Remove the LAN board (see step 4).
b. On the Power Supply board, unplug the cable from the top two connectors
on the RFI filter.
c. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the screw securing the
ground lead from the RFI filter to the short post on the chassis.
d. Press in on the two clips securing the RFI filter to the chassis, and then
pull the RFI filter out the back of the module.
7. Reinstallation:
a. Perform steps 2 through 6 in reverse order to reassemble and reinstall the
Power Supply module. When replacing the fan, be sure to install the fan
bracket with EMI clip as shown below.

Figure 2-12: Installing the fan

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–31


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Figure 2-13: Removing the LAN board, fan, and RFI filter from the Power Supply module

2–32 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Main board
1. Assemble equipment and locate the Main board:
a. You need a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip (See Table 2-5 on
page 2-20.).
b. Locate the Main board in the locator diagram. (See Figure 2-7 on
page 2-23.)
2. Remove the Front Panel assembly: This is required because of the USB
connector on the Main board. (See page 2-26, Front Panel assembly.)
3. Remove the Power Supply module: (See page 2-30, Power Supply module
subassemblies.)
4. Orient the instrument: Set the TG8000 so its bottom is down on the work
surface and its right side is facing you.
5. Remove the Main board: (See Figure 2-14.)
a. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the eight screws
securing the Main board to the chassis.
b. Lift the board up and away from the chassis.
6. Reinstallation: Perform steps 2 through 5 in reverse order to reinstall the
Main board. Torque all screws to 5.5 in/lbs.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–33


Mainframe removal and installation procedures

Figure 2-14: Main board removal

2–34 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Mainframe replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the TG8000 mainframe.
Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.

Parts ordering information


Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or
representative.
Changes to Tektronix products are sometimes made to accommodate improved
components as they become available and to give you the benefit of the latest
improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is important to include the
following information in your order.
Part number (see Part Number Revision Level below)
Instrument type or model number
Instrument serial number
Instrument modification number, if applicable
If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part, your
local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any
change in part number.

Part number revision level Tektronix part numbers contain two digits that show the revision level of the
part. For most parts in this manual, you will find the letters XX in place of the
revision level number.

When you order parts, Tektronix will provide you with the most current part for
your product type, serial number, and modification (if applicable). At the time of
your order, Tektronix will determine the part number revision level needed for
your product, based on the information you provide.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–35


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Module servicing Modules can be serviced by selecting one of the following three options. Contact
your local Tektronix service center or representative for repair assistance.

Module exchange. In some cases you may exchange your module for a
remanufactured module. These modules cost significantly less than new modules
and meet the same factory specifications. For more information about the module
exchange program, call 1-800-833-9200. Outside North America, contact a
Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the Tektronix Web site for a list of offices:
www.tektronix.com

Module repair and return. You may ship your module to us for repair, after which
we will return it to you.

New modules. You may purchase replacement modules in the same way as other
replacement parts.

Using the replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the mechanical and/or electrical components that are
replaceable for the TG8000. Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.
The following table describes each column in the parts list.

Table 2-6: Parts list column descriptions


Column Column name Description
1 Figure & Index Number Items in this section are referenced by figure and index numbers to the exploded
view illustrations that follow.
2 Tektronix Part Number Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix.
3 and 4 Serial Number Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective.
Column four indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued. No
entries indicates the part is good for all serial numbers.
5 Qty This indicates the quantity of parts used.
6 Name & Description An item name is separated from the description by a colon (:). Because of space
limitations, an item name may sometimes appear as incomplete. Use the U.S.
Federal Catalog handbook H6-1 for further item name identification.

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the TG8000 mainframe.

2–36 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Table 2-7: Mainframe replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
2-15--1 211-1194-01 28 SCREW, MACHINE; M3 X 6MM, FLH BLACK, CROSS REC
-2 200-5257-00 1 CABINET, TOP MAIN CHASSIS, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-3 650-5544-00 1 POWER SUPPLY ASSY, TG8000
The Power Supply assembly has replaceable subparts. (See Figure 2-18 on
page 2-43.)
-4 441-2690-00 1 CHASSIS, MAIN ASSEMBLY, SAFETY CONTROLLED
The chassis assembly has replaceable subparts. (See Figure 2-16 on page 2-39.)
-5 351-1136-00 1 RACK, KIT, SLIDES
The associated rackmount rail kit is supplied as a standard accessory with the
instrument. (See Table 2-12 on page 2-45.)
-6 354-0025-00 2 RING, RETAINING; EXTERNAL, U/O 0.187 DIA SFT, ZINC PLATED STEEL
-7 213-0216-00 2 THUMBSCREW; 10-32 X 0.85, 0.375 OD HD, ZINC PLATED STEEL, W/SLOT
-8 650-5546-00 1 FRONT PANEL ASSY, TG8000
The Front Panel assembly has replaceable subparts. (See Figure 2-17 on page 2-41.)

Figure 2-15: Mainframe replaceable parts

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–37


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Table 2-8: Chassis assembly replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
2-16- 1
-1 441-2690-00 1 CHASSIS, MAIN ASSEMBLY, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-2 878-0648-00 1 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY; ASSY; MAIN, TESTED
-3 211-A245-01 8 SCREW, MACHINE; M3 X 6 MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC, W/NUT & LOCK
WASHER
-4 146-0109-00 1 BATTERY, DRY; 3.0V, LITHIUM MANGANESE DIOXIDE, 210MAH, 20 X 3.22MM
COIN CELL WITH SOLDER TABS, CR2032-1HF1; SAFETY CONTROLLED
-5 348-2057-00 8 GASKET, ELEC; CONDUCTIVE URETHANE FORM STRIP, D-SHAPE, 6.4 MM W X
1.3 MM T, W/ADHESIVE TAPE, CUT LAIRD 4541 AB51G OR EQUIVALENT
Main board fuses (not shown)
159-5018-00 2 FUSE; 3.0A, 125V, FAST BLOW, 0.1 X 0.1 X 0.24, UL REG, CSA CERT, SAFETY
CONTROLLED
159-5022-00 15 FUSE; 5.0A, 125V; FAST BLOW, 0.1 X 0.1 X 0.24, UL REG, CSA CERT; 451005,
SAFETY CONTROLLED

2–38 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Figure 2-16: Chassis assembly replaceable parts

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–39


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Table 2-9: Front Panel assembly replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
2-17- 650-5546-00 1 FRONT PANEL ASSY, TG8000
Subparts
-1 367-0530-00 2 HANDLE, BOW; AL, 1.0 X 1.25, STAIN FINISH, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-2 335-2800-00 1 LABEL, FRONT PANEL TG8000, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-3 426-2637-00 1 FRONT PANEL BEZEL, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-4 348-2061-00 1 GASKET, DISPLAY DUST SEAL
-5 211-A245-01 13 SCREW, MACHINE; M3 X 6 MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC, W/NUT & LOCK
WASHER
-6 119-7930-00 1 DISPLAY MODULE ASSEMBLY, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-7 407-5661-00 1 FRONT PANEL SUPPORT BRACKET, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-8 211-0738-00 4 SCREW, MACHINE; 6-32 X 0.625, PNH, STL BLK ZI, TORX
-9 174-6136-00 1 CABLE, RIBBON, LCD, 2X8, 0.100 P FEMALE TO FEMALE
-10 131-6643-00 10 CONTACT, ELEC; GROUNDING, 0.169 L, 0.320 DEEP, ELECTROLESS NICKEL;
TDS3012
-11 174-6135-00 1 CABLE 2 X 13, RIBBON, KEYBOARD FEMALE TO FEMALE
-12 131-6521-00 1 CONTACT, ELEC; EMI, CLIP-ON, 0.38 L X 0.460 W (2 CONTACTS) X 0.45 HIGH,
ELECTROLESS NICKEL PLATE
-13 878-0649-00 1 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY; FRONT PANEL, UNTESTED
-14 260-2951-00 1 SWITCH KEYPAD (ELASTOMERIC MAT, TG8000), SAFETY CONTROLLED

2–40 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Figure 2-17: Front Panel assembly replaceable parts

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–41


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Table 2-10: Power Supply assembly replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
2-18- 650-5544-00 1 POWER SUPPLY ASSY, TG8000
Subparts
-1 441-2706-00 1 CHASSIS, POWER SUPPLY, ASSY TG8000, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-2 211-A245-01 11 SCREW, MACHINE; M3 X 6 MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC, W/NUT & LOCK
WASHER
-3 878-0685-00 1 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY; POWER ADAPTER BOARD, UNTESTED
-4 119-B054-00 1 POWER SUPPLY; INPUT 85-264 VAC, OUTPUT 5VDC, 20A; SAFETY CONTROLLED
-5 337-4579-00 1 SHIELD, INSULATOR, POWER SUPPLY TG8000, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-6 174-B788-00 1 CA ASSY, SP, ELEC; 8, 18 AWG, 10.0 CM L, 2-N; SAFETY CONTROLLED
-7 211-1194-01 3 SCREW, MACHINE; M3 X 6MM, FLH BLACK, CROSS REC
-8 200-5249-00 1 COVER, TOP, POWER SUPPLLY, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-9 131-6643-00 1 CONTACT, ELEC; GROUNDING, 0.169 L, 0.320 DEEP, ELECTROLESS NICKEL;
TDS3012
-10 878-0651-00 1 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY; FAN, UNTESTED
-11 407-5696-00 1 BRACKET, EMI CLIP, FAN MOUNT
-12 211-0553-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; 6-32 X 1.5, PNH, TORX T15, ZINC PLATED STEEL
-13 119-7932-00 1 FAN ASSEMBLY (12V, 13.4 CFM) 40 X 40 X 28 MM, TERMINATED, SAFETY
CONTROLLED
-14 333-4682-00 1 REAR PANEL POWER SUPPLY, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-15 211-1266-01 2 SCREW, METRIC 4-1.4 X 12MM, FAN, FLATHEAD, STL, ZINC PLATE, PHILLIPS
-16 367-0530-00 1 HANDLE, BOW; AL, 1.0 X 1.25, STAIN FINISH, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-17 119-7929-00 1 FILTER, EMI; AC LINE FILTER; 4.0A, 115-250 VAC, 50/60 HZ, IEC INPUT, LOCKING
CORD, FAST-ON/SOLDER LUG OUTPUT, SNAP-IN CHASSIS MOUNT, SAFETY
CONTROLLED
-18 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM, HEAD
HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-19 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-20 174-6276-00 1 CABLE, ASSEMBLY LINE FILTER, TG8000, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-21 212-A041-01 1 SCREW, MACHINE; M4 X 8MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC, W/NUT & LOCK
WASHER
-22 174-6151-01 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY (LINE FILTER TO GROUND 16 AWG), SAFETY CONTROLLED
-23 174-6138-00 1 CABLE ASSY, 2 X 5 FEMALE TO FEMALE, KEYED
-24 174-6277-00 1 CAT5E CABLE ASSEMBLY, RJ45, MALE/MALE 12.500 IN. L, SAFETY CONTROLLED

2–42 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Figure 2-18: Power Supply assembly replaceable parts

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–43


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Table 2-11: Blank panel replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
2-19- 614-1051-00 1 PANEL, BLANK ASSY, W/GASKET & LOCK SCREW
Subparts
-1 407-5498-00 1 BRACKET, FILLER PLATE, DIE CAST
-2 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-3 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM, HEAD
HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-4 348-A156-01 1 GASKET, SHIELD; FINGER TYPE, BE-CU, 8.13MM W X 2.79MM H X 406.4MM L

Figure 2-19: Blank panel replaceable parts

2–44 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


Mainframe replaceable parts list

Table 2-12: Standard and optional accessories for TG8000 mainframe


Component Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
351-1137-00 1 RACK, KIT, RAILS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, TG700 & TG8000 SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION
071-3036-XX 1 USER MANUAL, ENGLISH: TG8000
161-0216-00 1 CABLE ASSY, PWR,: 3,18 AWG, 2.5M L, BLACK (STANDARD ONLY)

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
614-1051-XX 1 PANEL, BLANK ASSY, W/GASKET & LOCK SCREW

POWER CORDS
161-0364-00 1 OPTION A0: NORTH AMERICA
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 18 AWG, 125V/10A, 2M, STR, IEC320, C13, RCPT, NEMA
5-15P, V-LOCK, US, SAFETY CONTROLLED
161-0365-00 1 OPTION A1: UNIVERSAL EURO
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1MM SQ, 250V/10A, 2M, STR, IEC320, C13, RCPT, CEE 7 /
VII, V-LOCK, EURO, SAFETY CONTROLLED
161-0366-00 1 OPTION A2: UNITED KINGDOM
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1MM SQ, 250V/10A, 2M, STR, IEC320, C13, RCPT, BS1363,
V-LOCK, UK, SAFETY CONTROLLED
161-0367-00 1 OPTION A3: AUSTRALIA
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1MM SQ, 250V/10A, 2M, STR, IEC320, C13, RCPT, AS3112,
V-LOCK, AUSTRALIA, SAFETY CONTROLLED
161-0368-01 1 OPTION A5: SWITZERLAND
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1MM SQ, 250V/10A, 2M, STR, IEC320, C13, RCPT, SEV 1011,
V-LOCK, SWISS, WITH PARTIALLY INSULATED PINS; SAFETY CONTROLLED;
CIQB
161-0369-00 1 OPTION A6: JAPAN
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1.25MM SQ, 125V/12A, 2M, STR, IEC320, C13, RCPT, JIS
8303, V-LOCK, JAPAN, SAFETY CONTROLLED
161-0370-00 1 OPTION A10: CHINA
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1MM SQ, 250V/10A, 2M, STR, IEC320, C13, RCPT, GB 2099,
V-LOCK, CHINA, SAFETY CONTROLLED
161-0400-00 1 OPTION A11: INDIA
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1.0MM SQ, 250V/6A, 2.5 METER, STR, IEC320/C13, RCPT,
PLUG, INDIA
161-0356-00 1 OPTION A12: BRAZIL
CABLE ASSY, PWR; 3, 1.00MM SQ, 250V/10A, 2.5 METER, RT ANGLE, IEC320/C13
CERTIFICATION, RCPT, BRAZIL, SAFETY CONTROLLED

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 2–45


Mainframe replaceable parts list

2–46 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AG7 Audio Generator module
AG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the AG7 Audio Generator module. Refer to Mainframe service
overview for information about servicing the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the AG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the AG7 module, review the following information:
AG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

AG7 module service The service information for the AG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
AG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module
or block level. (See page 3-2.)

AG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the


module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 3-3.)
AG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 3-4.)
AG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 3-7.)
AG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules of
the AG7 module by part number. (See page 3-9.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 3–1


AG7 module theory of operation

AG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the AG7
Audio Generator module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Audio memory This block contains 20/24 bits audio data for all of the serial audio outputs.

Audio data controller and The block is a part of the FPGA. It receives audio data from the Audio Memory
48 kHz decoder and encodes these data to serial audio data stream that comply with the AES/EBU
standard. It also generates 48 kHz clock signal.

Channel buffers (1+2, 3+4, These blocks receive the digital audio data from the FPGA and set the output
5+6, 7+8, and silence) amplitude to the specified level.

48 kHz clock buffer The block outputs 48 kHz clock signal. The output level of the clock signal can be
set to either a CMOS compatible level or 1 V. This feature is available through
jumper J452 on the circuit board.

Figure 3-1: Simplified block diagram of the AG7 module

3–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AG7 module interconnect diagram

AG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the AG7 Generator module and how it interconnects
with the TG8000 mainframe.
Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections, such as power supply
and oscillator, can be found in the TG8000 mainframe diagrams section of this
manual. (See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the AG7 module is located in the AG7 module theory of
operation section. (See page 3-2.)

Figure 3-2: AG7 module interconnect diagram

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 3–3


AG7 module troubleshooting

AG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the AG7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer to
the TG8000 mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 3-1: Equipment required to troubleshoot the AG7 module


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the trouble shooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

3–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AG7 module troubleshooting

AG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 3-3: AG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 3–5


AG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 3-4: AG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

3–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AG7 module removal and replacement

AG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the AG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 3-2: Required tools for removal and replacement of AG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 11 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A042-00
connectors of the AG7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 3–7


AG7 module removal and replacement

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connector:
connectors 1. Use the Removing a module section to remove the AG7 module from the
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect these cables:
The cable from J400 at 1+2 connector.
The cable from J410 at 3+4 connector.
The cable from J420 at 5+6 connector.
The cable from J430 at 7+8 connector.
The cable from J440 at SILENCE connector.
The cable from J450 at 48 kHz CLOCK connector.
3. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the four screws securing
the AG7 circuit board to the chassis.
4. Lift the circuit board up and away from chassis, and then place it on a static
free surface.
5. Use the 11 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged connector
to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
6. Perform steps 2 through 5 in reverse order to replace the connector.

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 in To replace the rear-panel connectors. (See
page 3-8.)
2. Use the 11 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the rear-panel
connectors.
3. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
4. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the connectors to the
chassis.
5. Carefully place the AG7 circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the four screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Reconnect all the cables to the rear-panel connectors.

3–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AG7 module replaceable parts list

AG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the AG7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the TG8000
mainframe replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the AG7 module.

Table 3-3: AG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Module no. Module no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
3-5- 116-A001-05 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: AG7
116-1168-00 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: AG7
-1 441-A267-03 1 CHASSIS, MODULE AG7: ASSY
-2 333-A404-00 1 PANEL, REAR: AG7, AL
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45 MM, LENGTH 11 MM, HEAD DIA 5 MM, HEAD
HEIGHT 2 MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 116-A001-05 2.5 CM SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1 MM L X 6.4 MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
348-A156-01 116-1168-00 1 GASKET, SHIELD; FINGER TYPE, BE-CU, 8.13 MM W X 2.79 MM H X 406.4 MM L
-6 131-6383-00 116-A001-03 6 CONN, RF JACK: BNC, 50 OHM, FEMALE, STR, SNAP IN/PNL MTG, 12.5 MM
MLG [MCF3]
131-1315-01 116-A001-04 116-A001-04 6 CONN, RF, JACK; BNC, PNL, 50 OHM, FEMALE, STR, PELTOLA/PNL MNT, SILVER
ALLOY, 0.576 MLG X 0.366 TERMN, 0.375-32 THD, D-FLAT
Attached Parts
210-0012-00 STAR WASHER
220-0495-00 NUT
131-8257-00 116-A001-05 6 CONNECTOR, PANEL MOUNT; BNC TO MCX
Attached Parts
210-0012-00 STAR WASHER
220-0495-00 NUT
-7 211-A245-01 4 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6 MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC, W/KOGATAMARU
& LOCK WASHER
-8 174-A278-00 116-A001-03 6 CA ASSY, RF :75 OHM COAX, 120 MM L, BLACK [QQB-0120-0]
174-5660-00 116-A001-04 116-A001-04 6 CA ASSY, RF; 50 OHM COAX, 6.0 INCH LENGTH, PELTOLA TO RA-MCX; AG7
174-5660-01 116-A001-05 6 CA ASSY, RF; 50 OHM COAX, 6.0 INCH LENGTH, MCX TO RA-MCX; AG7
-9 334-9399-00 1 MARKER, IDENT; BAR CODE LABEL, BASE 30, THERMAL LASTOMER

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 3–9


AG7 module replaceable parts list

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A042-00 1 NUT DRIVER, BOX: 11 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 14.5 MM

Figure 3-5: AG7 module exploded view

3–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 Analog Genlock module
AGL7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the AGL7 Analog Genlock module. Refer to Mainframe service
overview for information about servicing the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the AGL7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the AGL7 module, review the following information:
AGL7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

AGL7 module service The service information for the AGL7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
AGL7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 4-2, AGL7 module
adjustment procedures.)

AGL7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module


or block level. (See page 4-12.)
AGL7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the
module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 4-14.)
AGL7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 4-15.)
AGL7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 4-18.)
AGL7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the AGL7 module by part number. (See page 4-21.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–1


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

AGL7 module adjustment procedures


This section contains information needed to adjust the AGL7 module.
Adjustments in the AGL7 module are for the output offset, output gain, and
clock timing.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The AGL7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Access When adjusting the output offset, output gain, and clock timing, you need to
remove the top cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the output offset, output
gain, and clock timing.

Table 4-1: Equipment required for AGL7 module adjustment procedures


Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital multimeter 1 5 1/2 digits FLUKE 8842A
Oscilloscope 1 Bandwidth: 500 MHz or higher Tektronix DPO70404C with two P6139A
probes
75 Ω BNC cable 1 Length: 42 inches Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω coaxial terminator 1 Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

4–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the output offset and gain


Preparation To perform the output offset and gain adjustment, you must first remove the top
cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the AGL7
circuit board. See the following figure.

Figure 4-1: AGL7 module circuit board

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–3


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, BNC T connector, 75 Ω coaxial terminator, and


BNC female-to-dual banana adapter to connect the BLACK 1 connector on
the AGL7 Genlock module to the INPUT connector on the digital multimeter
as shown. (See Figure 4-2.)

Figure 4-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the output offset and gain
2. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.

4–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

3. Select the DAC Offset (0V DC) calibration signal for BLACK 1 through
BLACK 3 as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AGL7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CAL, and then press
the ENTER button.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Offset (0V
DC), and then press the ENTER button.
f. Press the BACK button twice.
g. Repeat parts c through f of this step to select the calibration signal for
BLACK 2.
h. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 3, and then
press the ENTER button.
i. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst (Same
as BLACK2), and then press the ENTER button.
j. Press the BACK button to return the AGL7 main menu.
4. Locate variable resistor R691 on the AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-1.)
5. Adjust R691 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
6. Move the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK
2 connector on the AGL7 Genlock module.
7. Locate variable resistor R491 on the AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-1.)

NOTE. You may need to disconnect the cable to Channel 1 in order to adjust R491.

8. Adjust R491 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.


9. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK 3
connector on the AGL7 Genlock module.
10. Locate variable resistor R591 on the AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-1.)
11. Adjust R591 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–5


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

12. Select the DAC Gain (700 mV DC) calibration signal for BLACK 1 through
BLACK 3 as follows:
a. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CAL, and then press
the ENTER button.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (700mV
DC), and then press the ENTER button.
d. Press the BACK button twice to return the AGL7 main menu.
e. Repeat parts a through d of this step to select the calibration signal for
BLACK 2. BLACK 3 uses the previous setting (same as BLACK 2).
13. Locate variable resistor R681 on the AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-1.)
14. Adjust R681 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
15. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2
connector on the AGL7 Genlock module.
16. Locate variable resistor R481 on the AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-1.)
17. Adjust R481 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
18. Move the BNC cable from the BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK 3
connector on the AGL7 Genlock module.
19. Locate variable resistor R581 on the AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-1.)
20. Adjust R581 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.

4–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the clock timing (older versions only)


NOTE. Only perform the following adjustment procedure if your AGL7 module
has adjustments R470, R471, R473, R474, and R475 as shown in the figure below.

Preparation To perform the clock timing adjustment, you must first remove the top cover of
the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the AGL7
module circuit board. (See Figure 4-3.)

Figure 4-3: AGL7 module circuit board (older versions only)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–7


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Select the NTSC Black Burst signal for BLACK 1 and BLACK 2 and
1080/59.94i signal for BLACK 3 as follows:
a. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select NTSC, and then
press the ENTER button.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Black Burst, and
then press the ENTER button.
d. Press the BACK button twice to return the AGL7 main menu.
e. Repeat parts a through d of this step to select the NTSC Black Burst
signal for BLACK 2.
f. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 3, and then
press the ENTER button.
g. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080/59.94i, and
then press the ENTER button.
h. Press the BACK button to return the AGL7 main menu.

4–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

2. Set the horizontal fine timing for BLACK 1 through BLACK 3 to 0.00 ns as
follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GENLOCK and
then press the ENTER button.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select INTERNAL, and
then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the BACK button to return the AGL7 main menu.
d. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
f. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TIMING, and then
press the ENTER button.
g. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select Horizontal Fine,
and then press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to set the timing to
0.00 ns.
h. Press the BACK button twice to return the AGL7 main menu.
i. Repeat parts e through h of this step to set the horizontal fine timing for
BLACK 2 and BLACK 3 to 0.00 ns.
3. Attach the two P6139A probes to the oscilloscope CH1 and CH2 inputs.
4. Locate test points TP410, TP420, TP430, TP501, TP502, and TP504 on the
AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-3.)
5. Locate variable resistors R470, R471, R472, R473, R474, and R475 on the
AGL7 circuit board. (See Figure 4-3.)
6. Turn all the variable resistors completely counterclockwise.
7. Connect the probe tip from the oscilloscope CH1 input to TP501.
8. Connect the probe tip from the oscilloscope CH2 input to TP430.
9. Set the oscilloscope settings as indicated below:

Vertical 500 mV/div


Vertical position –3.0 div
Horizontal 2 ns/div
Trigger source CH1
Trigger level 1.5 V
Trigger slope Rising Edge

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–9


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

10. Adjust R470 so that the CH2 signal is delayed by 4 ±0.5 ns from the
CH1 signal. (See Figure 4-4.)

Figure 4-4: Timing relationship between CH1 and CH2 signals


11. Move the CH1 probe from TP501 to TP502.
12. Change the horizontal fine timing of the BLACK 3 output from –7.0 ns to
+7.0 ns and verify that the CH2 signal moves at least 13.5 ns.
13. If the CH2 signal moves less than 13.5 ns, turn R471 to its center position
and then perform the following steps:
a. Move the CH1 probe from TP502 to TP501.
b. Set the horizontal fine timing of BLACK 3 output to 0.00 ns.
c. Adjust R470 so that the CH2 signal is delayed by 4 ±0.5 ns from the
CH1 signal.
d. Change the horizontal fine timing of the BLACK 3 output from –7.0 ns to
+7.0 ns and verify that the CH2 signal moves at least 13.5 ns.
If the CH2 signal still moves less than 13.5 ns, turn R471 completely
clockwise and then repeat parts a through d.
14. Change the CH2 probe connection from TP430 to TP410.
15. Adjust R472 so that the CH2 signal is delayed by 8 ±0.5 ns from the
CH1 signal.
16. Change the CH1 probe connection from TP502 to TP504.

4–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module adjustment procedures

17. Change the horizontal fine timing of the BLACK 1 output from –10.0 ns to
+10.0 ns and verify that the CH2 signal moves at least 18.5 ns.
18. If the CH2 signal moves less than 18.5 ns, turn R473 its center position and
then perform the following steps:
a. Change the CH1 probe connection from TP504 to TP502.
b. Set the horizontal fine timing of BLACK 1 output to 0.00 ns.
c. Adjust R472 so that the CH2 signal is delayed by 8 ±0.5 ns from the
CH1 signal.
d. Change the horizontal fine timing of the BLACK 1 output from –10.0 ns
to +10.0 ns and verify that the CH2 signal moves at least 18.5 ns.
If the CH2 signal still moves less than 18.5 ns, turn R473 completely
clockwise and then repeat parts a through d.
19. Change the CH2 probe connection from TP410 to TP420.
20. Adjust R474 so that the CH2 signal is delayed by 8 ±0.5 ns from the
CH1 signal.
21. Change the CH1 probe connection from TP504 to TP502.
22. Change the horizontal fine timing of the BLACK 2 output from –10.0 ns to
+10.0 ns and verify that the CH2 signal moves at least 18.5 ns.
23. If the CH2 signal moves less than 18.5 ns, turn R475 its center position and
then perform the following steps:
a. Change the CH1 probe connection from TP502 to TP504.
b. Set the horizontal fine timing of BLACK 2 output to 0.00 ns.
c. Adjust R474 so that the CH2 signal is delayed by 8 ±0.5 ns from the
CH1 signal.
d. Change the horizontal fine timing of the BLACK 2 output from –10.0 ns
to +10.0 ns and verify that the CH2 signal moves at least 18.5 ns.
If the CH2 signal still moves less than 18.5 ns, turn R475 completely
clockwise and then repeat parts a through d.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–11


AGL7 module theory of operation

AGL7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the AGL7
Analog Genlock module.

Analog genlock
The analog genlock consists of the following blocks.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Amp and restorer This block consists of amplifiers to adjust the amplitude of the signal from REF or
CW input and restorer to recover the DC component of the signal.

Sync separator The sync separator separates the sync signals such as H sync, V sync, or composite
sync from the conditioned REF signal if the signal contains the sync.

A/D converter The A/D converter digitizes the analog input signal to 10 bits digital data for
genlock operation. This data is read by the CPU in the mainframe and used to
control the master oscillator frequency.

Genlock controller This block controls the A/D converter, memory, and sync separator to obtain
correct digital data.

Black burst generator


The black burst generator consists of the following blocks:

Black burst generator This block generates NTSC or PAL black burst digital data.

Trilevel sync generator This block generates trilevel sync digital data.

D/A converter and amp This block consists of a D/A converter, two amplifiers, and a filter. It converts the
digital data from the black burst generator or trilevel sync generator to an analog
signal and reconstructs the signal for output. The "D/A Converter & Amp 3" also
has a wide bandwidth filter for the HDTV trilevel sync signal.

4–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module theory of operation

Word clock generator This block generates a 48 kHz word clock signal.

Figure 4-5: Simplified block diagram of the AGL7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–13


AGL7 module interconnect diagram

AGL7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the AGL7 module and how it interconnects with the
TG8000 mainframe. Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections,
such as power supply and oscillator, can be found in the Mainframe diagrams
section of this manual. (See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the AGL7 module is located in the AGL7 module theory
of operation section. (See page 4-12.)

Figure 4-6: AGL7 module interconnect diagram

4–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module troubleshooting

AGL7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the AGL7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer to
the TG8000 mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 4-2: Equipment required for AGL7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the troubleshooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–15


AGL7 module troubleshooting

AGL7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 4-7: AGL7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

4–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module troubleshooting

Figure 4-8: AGL7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–17


AGL7 module removal and replacement

AGL7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the AGL7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 4-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of AGL7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older AGL7 modules

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

4–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module removal and replacement

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connectors:
connectors 1. Use the Removing a module section to remove the AGL7 Genlock module
from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at CH1_OUT (BLACK1 BNC), CH2_OUT (BLACK2
BNC), CH3_OUT (BLACK3 BNC), RF(R)IN (Right RF BNC), RF(L)IN
(Center RF BNC), and CW_IN (CW BNC) on the AGL7 module circuit board.
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

Dressing the AGL7 module BNC cables. When you are reinstalling the BNC
cables, dress the cables as follows: (See Figure 4-9.)
Dress the cables so that the top three cables cross over the bottom three
cables at right angles.
Position the cables to minimize bending at the exit points of the black heat
shrink. That is, make bends in the brown portion of the coax cable between
the heat shrink tubing ends, not within the heat shrink.
Align the CW cable as shown below to prevent the connector from hitting the
chassis during module installation or removal.

Figure 4-9: Dressing the AGL7 module BNC cables

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–19


AGL7 module removal and replacement

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the six screws securing the
AGL7 circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from chassis, and then place it on a static
free surface.
4. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
5. Carefully place the circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the five screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the rear-panel
connectors to the chassis.

4–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AGL7 module replaceable parts list

AGL7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the AGL7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the TG8000
mainframe replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the AGL7 module.

Table 4-4: AGL7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
4-10- 116-A002-12 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: AGL7
4-10-1 441-A269-02 1 CHASSIS, MODULE AGL7: ASSY
-2 333-A405-00 1 PANEL, REAR: AGL7, AL
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 2.5 SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1 MM L X 6.4 MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
CM
-6 211-A245-01 5 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6 MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC,
W/KOGATAMARU & LOCK WASHER
-7 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.
-8 342-A146-00 1 INSULATOR, PLATE: HEAT CONDUCTOR, RUBBER, 20 MM X 20 MM X 100 MM
THK [TC1000-TKC]
-9 174-B847-00 6 CABLE ASSY, RF: 75 OHM COAX (RG179), 7.5 CM L, BNC TO MCX

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUTDRIVER, BOX: 14 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19 MM

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 4–21


AGL7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 4-10: AGL7 module exploded view

4–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 Analog Test Generator module
ATG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the ATG7 Analog Test Generator module. Refer to Mainframe
service overview for information about servicing the TG8000 mainframe. (See
page 2-1.)
If the ATG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the ATG7 module, review the following information:
ATG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

ATG7 module service The service information for the ATG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
ATG7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 5-2, ATG7 module
adjustment procedures.)

ATG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module


or block level. (See page 5-9.)
ATG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the
module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 5-10.)
ATG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 5-11.)
ATG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 5-14.)
ATG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the ATG7 module by part number. (See page 5-16.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–1


ATG7 module adjustment procedures

ATG7 module adjustment procedures


Adjustments in the ATG7 module are for the output offset, output gain, and
chroma gain.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The ATG7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Access When adjusting the blanking, luminance, and chrominance levels, you need to
remove the top cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the output offset, output
gain, and chroma gain.

Table 5-1: Equipment required for ATG7 module adjustment procedures


Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital multimeter 1 5 1/2 digits FLUKE 8842A
Oscilloscope 1 Bandwidth: 1 GHz or higher Tektronix DPO70404C with TekConnect
75 Ω input TCA-75 adapter
75 Ω BNC cable 1 Length: 42 inches Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω coaxial terminator 1 Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

5–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the output offset and gain


Preparation To perform the output offset and gain adjustment, you must first remove the top
cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the ATG7
circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)

Figure 5-1: ATG7 module circuit board

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, BNC T connector, 75 Ω coaxial terminator, and


BNC female-to-dual banana adapter to connect the BLACK 1 connector on
the ATG7 module to the input connector on the digital multimeter. (See
Figure 5-2.)

Figure 5-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the ATG7 output offset and gain

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–3


ATG7 module adjustment procedures

2. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:


a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
3. Select the DAC Offset (0 V DC) calibration signal for the outputs as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the ATG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Offset (0 V
DC), and then press the ENTER button.
e. Press the BACK button.
f. Repeat parts a through e of this step to select the calibration signal for
BLACK 2, SIGNAL, and BARS outputs.
4. Locate variable resistor R491 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
5. Adjust R491 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
6. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2
connector on the ATG7 module.
7. Locate variable resistor R591 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
8. Adjust R591 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
9. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 2 connector to the SIGNAL
connector on the ATG7 module.
10. Locate variable resistor R691 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
11. Adjust R691 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
12. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL connector to the BARS
connector on the ATG7 module.
13. Locate variable resistor R791 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
14. Adjust R791 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.

5–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module adjustment procedures

15. Select the DAC Gain (700 mV DC) calibration signal for outputs as follows:
a. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (700 mV
DC), and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the BACK button.
d. Repeat parts a through c of this step to select the calibration signal for
the BLACK 2, SIGNAL, and BARS outputs.
16. Locate variable resistor R481 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
17. Adjust R481 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
18. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 1 connector to the
BLACK 2 connector on the ATG7 module.
19. Locate variable resistor R581 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
20. Adjust R581 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
21. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 2 connector to the
SIGNAL connector on the ATG7 module.
22. Locate variable resistor R681 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
23. Adjust R681 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
24. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL connector to the BARS
connector on the ATG7 module.
25. Locate variable resistor R781 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
26. Adjust R781 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–5


ATG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust chroma gain


Preparation To perform the chroma gain adjustment, you must first remove the top cover of
the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the ATG7
circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the SIGNAL connector on the ATG7
Generator module to the CH 1 connector on the oscilloscope. (See Figure 5-3.)

Figure 5-3: Equipment connection for adjusting ATG7 chroma gain


2. Select the 75% Color Bars signal for the SIGNAL and BARS outputs as
follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the ATG7 main menu.
b. Press the BARS button to display 75% Color Bars.
c. Press the BACK button to exit the TEST SIGNAL select menu. The
ATG7 display should show 75% Color Bars.

5–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module adjustment procedures

d. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BARS, and then
press the ENTER button.
f. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select PAL, and then press
the ENTER button.
g. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 75% Colour Bar,
and then press the ENTER button.
h. Press the BACK button twice to return to the ATG7 module main menu.
3. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertical: 100 mV / div
Sample depth: 100 K
Horizontal: 2 μs / div
Trigger position: 50%
Vert offset: 700 mV
Trigger: 720 mV, rising edge
Hold-off: 63 μs
4. After you see a stable trace on the oscilloscope, change the Vertical setting to
5 mV / div.
5. Locate the flat bar followed by the burst packets for yellow and cyan as
shown below.

Figure 5-4: Triggered display for adjusting the ATG7 module chroma gain

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–7


ATG7 module adjustment procedures

6. Locate variable resistor R927 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
7. Adjust R927 to match the level of the first chroma packet to the preceding
75% flat bar.
8. Change the BNC cable connection from the SIGNAL connector to the BARS
connector on the ATG7 module.
9. Locate variable resistor R977 on the ATG7 circuit board. (See Figure 5-1.)
10. Adjust R977 to match the first chroma packet to the level of the preceding
75% flat bar.

5–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module theory of operation

ATG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the ATG7
Analog Test Generator module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Black burst generator This block generates NTSC or PAL black burst digital data.

BARS generator This block generates digital data for color bars, black burst, and other signals.

SIGNAL generator This block generates digital data for the test signals assigned to the front-panel
buttons.

D/A converter and amp This block consists of a D/A converter, two amplifiers, and a filter. It converts
the digital data from the black burst generator, BARS generator, and SIGNAL
generator to analog signal and reconstruct the signal for output.

Figure 5-5: Simplified block diagram of the ATG7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–9


ATG7 module interconnect diagram

ATG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the ATG7 module and how it interconnects with
the TG8000 mainframe.
Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections, such as power supply
and oscillator, can be found in the Mainframe diagrams section of this manual.
(See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the ATG7 module is located in the ATG7 module theory of
operation section. (See page 5-9.)

Figure 5-6: ATG7 module interconnect diagram

5–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module troubleshooting

ATG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the ATG7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer to
the TG8000 mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 5-2: Equipment required for ATG7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin troubleshooting, create a preset to save your instrument settings
as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select a preset number to
save instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–11


ATG7 module troubleshooting

ATG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 5-7: ATG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

5–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 5-8: ATG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–13


ATG7 module removal and replacement

ATG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the ATG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 5-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of ATG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors of the ATG7 module
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older ATG7 modules

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel To replace the rear-panel connector:


connectors 1. Use the Removing a module section to remove the ATG7 module from the
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at J830 (BLACK 1), J880 (BLACK 2), J930 (SIGNAL)
and J980 (BARS) on the ATG7 module circuit board.
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

5–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module removal and replacement

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the five screws securing the
ATG7 module circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from chassis, and then place it on a static
free surface.
4. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
5. Carefully place the circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the five screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the rear-panel
connectors to the chassis.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–15


ATG7 module replaceable parts list

ATG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the ATG7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the TG8000
mainframe replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the ATG7 module.

Table 5-4: ATG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
5-9- 116-A014-04 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: ATG7
5-9-1 441-A269-02 1 CHASSIS, MODULE AGL7: ASSY
-2 333-A427-00 1 PANEL, REAR: ATG7, AL
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM, HEAD
HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 2.5 CM SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1MM LX6.4MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
-6 174-B851-00 4 CABLE ASSY,RF:75OHM COAX(RG179),5.5CM L,BNC TO MCX
-7 211-A245-01 5 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC, W/KOGATAMARU
& LOCK WASHER
-8 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUTDRIVER, BOX: 14MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19MM

5–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


ATG7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 5-9: ATG7 module exploded view

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 5–17


ATG7 module replaceable parts list

5–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 Analog Video Generator module
AVG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the AVG7 Analog Video Generator module. Refer to Mainframe
service overview for information about servicing the TG8000 mainframe. (See
page 2-1.)
If the AVG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the AVG7 module, review the following information:
AVG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

AVG7 module service The service information for the AVG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
AVG7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 6-2, AVG7 module
adjustment procedures.)

AVG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module


or block level. (See page 6-19.)
AVG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the
module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 6-21.)
AVG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 6-22.)
AVG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 6-25.)
AVG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the AVG7 module by part number. (See page 6-27.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–1


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

AVG7 module adjustment procedures


This section contains information needed to adjust the AVG7 module.
Adjustment in the AVG7 module are for the output offset and gain, frame timing
and clock timing, group delay, frequency response, and interchannel delay.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements:

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The AVG7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

WARNING. To avoid potential shock, which could cause injury or death, use
caution when removing the TG8000 mainframe top cover with power connected.

Access When adjusting the AVG7 module, remove the top cover of the
TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)

NOTE. If the serial number of your instrument is B010600 and above, replace the
resistor and capacitor numbers in the figures and procedures as follows:
R6xxx → R6xxx_1 (for example, R651A → R651A_1)
R7xxx → R6xxx_2 (for example, R751A → R651A_2)
R8xxx → R6xxx_3 (for example, R851A → R651A_3
C6xxx → R6xxx_1 (for example, C604B → C604B_1)
C7xxx → R6xxx_2 (for example, C704B → C604B_2)
C8xxx → R6xxx_3 (for example, C804B → C604B_3)

6–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the output offset and
gain, frame timing and clock timing, group delay, frequency response, and
interchannel delay.

Table 6-1: Equipment required for the AVG7 module adjustment procedures
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Test signal generator 1 Tektronix ATG7
Oscilloscope 1 Bandwidth: 1 GHz or higher Function: Tektronix DPO70404 with TCA75 75 Ω
Mask testing signal adapter
Digital multimeter 1 5 1/2 digits FLUKE 8842A
Peak detector amplifier 1 Tektronix part number 015-0408-00 and
TM500 series power supply
Peak detector head 1 Tektronix part number 015-0413-00
Probe 2 X 10 Tektronix P6139A
75 Ω BNC cable 3 Length: 72 inches Tektronix part number 012-0159-01
75 Ω BNC cable 1 5C-2V, 1 m Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
75 Ω feed-through termination 1 Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial termination 1 Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter
Flat blade screwdriver for 1 Bit shape: 2.2 × 0.4 mm Murata KMDR010
adjusting C604B, C704B, and
C804B
BNC female-to-female 1 Canare BCJ-J
connector

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–3


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the output offset and gain


Preparation To perform the output offset and gain adjustment, you must first remove the top
cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the AVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)

Figure 6-1: Location of the variable resistors for the output offset and gain adjustment

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, BNC T connector, 75 Ω coaxial termination, and


BNC female-to-dual banana adapter to connect the upper CH 1 connector
on the AVG7 Generator module to the INPUT connector on the digital
multimeter. (See Figure 6-2.)

Figure 6-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the output offset and gain

6–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

2. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:


a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
3. Select the DAC Gain (GBR) : 0 mV calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (GBR),
and then press the ENTER button.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then press
the ENTER button.
4. Locate variable resistor R856A on the AVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
5. Adjust R856A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
6. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
7. Locate variable resistor R756A on the AVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
8. Adjust R756A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
10. Locate variable resistor R656A on the AVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
11. Adjust R656A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
12. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
13. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 700.397mV, and then
press the ENTER button.
14. Locate variable resistors R851A (coarse) and R851B (fine) on the AVG7
circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
15. Adjust R851A and R851B so that the output gain is 700.4 mV ±1 mV.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–5


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

16. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
17. Locate variable resistors R751A (coarse) and R751B (fine) on the AVG7
circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
18. Adjust R751A and R751B so that the output gain is 700.4 mV ±1 mV.
19. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
20. Locate variable resistors R651A (coarse) and R651B (fine) on the AVG7
circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
21. Adjust R651A and R651B so that the output gain is 700.4 mV ±1 mV.
22. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
23. Select the DAC Gain (YPbPr) : 0 mV calibration signal for CH 2 and CH
3 as follows:
a. Press the BACK button to display the CALIBRATION menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (YPbPr),
and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then press
the ENTER button.
24. Locate variable resistor R757A on the AVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
25. Adjust R757A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
26. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 Generator module.
27. Locate variable resistor R657A on the AVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 6-1.)
28. Adjust R657A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.

To adjust group delay


Preparation To perform the group delay adjustment, you must first remove the top cover of
the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors and capacitors on
the AVG7 module circuit board. (See Figure 6-3.)

6–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

Figure 6-3: Location of the variable resistors and capacitors for the group delay adjustment

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the TCA75 75 Ω signal adapter to connect the
upper CH 1 connector on the AVG7 module to the CH 1 input connector on
the oscilloscope. (See Figure 6-4.)
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through termination to connect the
BLACK 1 connector on the test signal generator to the CH 2 input connector
on the oscilloscope. (See Figure 6-4.)

Figure 6-4: Equipment connection for adjusting the group delay

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–7


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

3. Set the oscilloscope settings as indicated below:

Vertical scale CH 1: 5 mV/div, CH 2: 1.00 V/div


Bandwidth 250 MHz (CH 1)
Horizontal scale 100 μs/div
Horizontal delay time 200 ns/div
Delayed runs time 993.472 μs (Delayed Only)
Trigger position 50%
Trigger source CH 2
Trigger type Edge
DPO (InstaVu) Variable Persistence: 500 ms
CH 2 waveform OFF

4. Set the test signal generator (ATG7 module) settings as indicated below:

Output selection BLACK 1


Signal format PAL
Test signal Field Reference

5. Select the CCIR17 signal of the AVG7 Generator module as follows:


a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select PAL-1, and then press the ENTER
button.
c. Press the OTHER button to select CCIR17.
6. Select the CH1/2/3: Composites video configuration as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CONFIGURATION,
and then press the ENTER button to access the CONFIGURATION
submenu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CH1/2/3:
Composites, and then press the ENTER button.
7. Locate variable capacitors C837A, C737A, C637A, C804B, C704B, C604B,
C835A, C735A, and C635A, and variable resistors R835A, R735A, and
R635A. (See Figure 6-4.)
8. Rotate C837A, C737A, and C637A 180° from its initial position and set
R835A, R735A, and R635A to its center position.

6–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

9. Adjust C804B and C835A so that the baseline of the modulated 20T pulse
signal is flat. (See Figure 6-5.)

Figure 6-5: Adjusting the baseline of the modulated 20T pulse signal
10. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 module.
11. Adjust C704B and C735A so that the baseline of the modulated 20T pulse
signal is flat.
12. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 module.
13. Adjust C604B and C635A so that the baseline of the modulated 20T pulse
signal is flat.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–9


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the frequency response


Preparation To perform the frequency response adjustment, you must first remove the top
cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors and capacitors on
the AVG7 module circuit board. (See Figure 6-6.)

Figure 6-6: Location of the variable resistors and capacitors for the frequency response adjustment

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the two 75 Ω BNC cable, peak detector head, and BNC female-to-female
connector to connect the upper CH 1 connector on the AVG7 module to the
+INPUT connector on the peak detector amplifier. (See Figure 6-7.)
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the OUTPUT connector on the peak
detector amplifier to the CH 1 input connector on the oscilloscope. (See
Figure 6-7.)
3. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through termination to connect the
BLACK 1 connector on the test signal generator to the CH 2 input connector
on the oscilloscope. (See Figure 6-7.)

6–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

Figure 6-7: Equipment connection for adjusting the frequency response


4. Set the oscilloscope settings as indicated below:

Vertical scale CH 1: 2 mV/div, CH 2: 1.00 V/div


Bandwidth 20 MHz (CH 1)
Horizontal scale 2 ms/div
Trigger position 10%
Trigger source CH 2
Trigger type Edge
Acquire menu Peak Detect

5. Set the test signal generator (ATG7 module) settings as indicated below:

Output selection BLACK 1


Signal format NTSC
Test signal Field Reference

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–11


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

6. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:


a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
7. Select the 525 GBR signal format as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the FORMAT button to select 525 GBR, and then press the
ENTER button.
c. Press the COLOR BAR button.
8. Select the DAC Test calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Test, and then
press the ENTER button.
c. Press the ENTER button again to confirm the signal output.
9. Select the Sync ON All Channels mode as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO, and then
press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GBR SYNC.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Sync ON All
Channels, and then press the ENTER button.
10. Locate variable capacitors C835A, C735A, and C635A, and variable resistors
R835A, R735A, and R635A on the AVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 6-6.)
11. Turn the LEVEL knob on the peak detector amplifier so that the green LED
lights.
12. Adjust C835A so that the signal amplitudes of 500 kHz and 5 MHz are at the
same level. (See Figure 6-8.)

6–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

Figure 6-8: Adjusting the signal amplitudes


13. Adjust R835A so that the signal amplitudes from 500 kHz to 5 MHz are
at the same level. (See Figure 6-8.)
14. Readjust C835A and R835A so that the differences of the signal amplitudes
from 500 kHz to 5 MHz are within 2 mV.
15. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AVG7 module.
16. Adjust C735A so that the signal amplitudes of 500 kHz and 5 MHz are at the
same level.
17. Adjust R735A so that the signal amplitudes from 500 kHz to 5 MHz are
at the same level.
18. Readjust C735A and R735A so that the differences of the signal amplitudes
from 500 kHz to 5 MHz are within 2 mV.
19. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AVG7 module.
20. Adjust C635A so that the signal amplitudes of 500 kHz and 5 MHz are at the
same level.
21. Adjust R635A so that the signal amplitudes from 500 kHz to 5 MHz are
at the same level.
22. Readjust C635A and R635A so that the differences of the signal amplitudes
from 500 kHz to 5 MHz are within 2 mV.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–13


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust interchannel delay


Preparation To perform the interchannel adjustment, you must first remove the top cover of
the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable capacitors on the AVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 6-9.)

Figure 6-9: Location of the variable capacitors for the interchannel delay adjustment

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the TCA75 75 Ω signal adapter to connect the
upper CH 1 connector on the AVG7 module to the CH 1 input connector on
the oscilloscope. (See Figure 6-10.)
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the TCA75 75 Ω signal adapter to connect the
upper CH 2 connector on the AVG7 module to the CH 2 input connector on
the oscilloscope. (See Figure 6-10.)
3. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable and the 75 Ω feed-through termination to connect the
BLACK 1 connector on the test signal generator to the CH 3 input connector
on the oscilloscope. (See Figure 6-10.)

6–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

Figure 6-10: Equipment connection for adjusting the interchannel delay


4. Set the oscilloscope settings as indicated below:

Vertical scale CH 1 and CH 2: 5 mV/div, CH 3: 1.00 V/div


Bandwidth 250 MHz (CH 1 and CH 2)
Vertical offset 0 mV (CH 1 and CH 2)
Horizontal scale 20 μs/div
Horizontal delay time 50 ns/div
Delayed runs time 6.760 μs (Delayed Only)
Trigger position 50%
Trigger source CH 3
Trigger type Edge
Acquire menu Average 8
Repetitive Signal: OFF
CH 3 WAVEFORM OFF

5. Set the test signal generator (ATG7 module) settings as indicated below:

Output selection BLACK 1


Signal format NTSC
Test signal Field Reference

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–15


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

6. Use the CH 2 vertical position knob on the oscilloscope to align the CH 2


trace to the CH 1 trace with no signal input.
7. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
8. Select the DAC Test calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AVG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Test, and then
press the ENTER button.
d. Press the ENTER button again to confirm the signal output.
9. Select the Sync ON All Channels mode as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select VIDEO, and then
press the ENTER button to access the VIDEO submenu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select GBR SYNC.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Sync ON All
Channels, and then press the ENTER button.
10. Adjust R756A so that the CH 2 blanking level is aligned to the CH 1 blanking
level.
11. Move the BNC cable from the CH 2 connector to the CH 3 connector on
the AVG7 module.
12. Adjust R656A so that the CH 3 blanking level is aligned to the CH 1 blanking
level.

6–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

13. Change the oscilloscope settings as follows:

Vertical offset –150 mV (CH 1 and CH 2)


Horizontal delay time 2 ns/div
Delayed runs time 6.224 μs (Delayed Only)

14. Check the time delay between the CH 1 and CH 3 signals and then perform
the following steps:
a. If the CH 1 signal is delayed from the CH 3 signal, move the BNC cable
from the CH 3 connector to the CH 2 connector on the AVG7 Generator
module.
b. If the CH 3 signal is delayed from the CH 1 signal, move the BNC cable
from the CH 1 connector to the CH 2 connector on the AVG7 Generator
module.
15. Using the most delayed signal as a reference, adjust the following variable
capacitors so that the other signals are delayed within 0.5 ns from the most
delayed signal:

CH 1 output C837A
CH 2 output C737A
CH 3 output C637A

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–17


AVG7 module adjustment procedures

To confirm the frequency response


After you have performed the group delay adjustment, be sure to check that the
frequency response meets the specifications.

Procedure 1. Use the equipment connection and controls from the frequency response
adjustment. (See page 6-10.)
2. Check that the differences of each signal amplitude from 500 kHz to 5 MHz
are less than or equal to 2 mV. If necessary, readjust the following variable
resistors and capacitors:

CH 1 output C835A and R835A


CH 2 output C735A and R735A
CH 3 output C635A and R637A

To confirm the interchannel delay


After you have performed the group delay adjustment, be sure to check that the
interchannel delay meets the specifications.

Procedure 1. Use the equipment connection and controls from the interchannel adjustment.
(See page 6-14.)
2. Check that the time delay among the channel outputs is less than or equal to
1 ns. If necessary, readjust the following variable capacitors:

CH 1 output C837A
CH 2 output C737A
CH 3 output C637A

6–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module theory of operation

AVG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the AVG7
module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Line memory Line memory holds the actual sample points which define a digital signal.

Address generator This block consists of a frame delay, an MPU interface, a sequencer, an SDRAM
controller, and a blanking data generator. It interfaces the Frame Memory and
the Line Memory and controls the output sequence of the video data in these
memories.

Frame memory Frame memory contains a series of pointers that control the order the video lines
stored in the Line Memory are used to produce digital signals.

Overlay controller This block consists of an MPU interface and an overlay controller. It inserts data
from the Overlay Memory into the Line Memory data stream to create circular
patterns, ID text, and logo.

Overlay memory Overlay memory generates timings to multiplex the line memory data and the
overlay data used for a circle, ID text, and logo overlay.

D/A converter and amp This block consists of a D/A converter, two amplifiers, and a filter. It converts
the digital data from the Overlay Controller to analog signal and reconstruct the
signal for output.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–19


AVG7 module theory of operation

Figure 6-11: Simplified block diagram of the AVG7 module

6–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module interconnect diagram

AVG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the AVG7 module and how it interconnects with
the TG8000 mainframe.
Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections, such as power supply
and oscillator, can be found in the Mainframe diagrams section of this manual.
(See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the AVG7 module is located in the AVG7 module theory
of operation section. (See page 6-19.)

Figure 6-12: AVG7 module interconnect diagram

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–21


AVG7 module troubleshooting

AVG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the AVG7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 6-2: Equipment required for AVG7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the troubleshooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

6–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module troubleshooting

AVG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 6-13: AVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–23


AVG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 6-14: AVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

6–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module removal and replacement

AVG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the AVG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 6-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of the AVG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors of the AVG7 module
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older AVG7 modules

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–25


AVG7 module removal and replacement

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connector:
connectors 1. Use the Removing a module section to remove the AVG7 module from the
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at J830A (upper CH 1), J830B (lower CH 1), J730A
(upper CH 2), J730B (lower CH 2), J630A (upper CH 3), and J630B (lower
CH 3) on the AVG7 module circuit board.
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the five screws securing the
AVG7 module circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from the chassis, and then place it on
a static free surface.
4. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
5. Carefully place the circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the five screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the rear-panel
connectors to the chassis.

6–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AVG7 module replaceable parts list

AVG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the AVG7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the TG8000
mainframe replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the AVG7 module.

Table 6-4: AVG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
6-15- 116-A017-05 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: AVG7
6-15-1 441-A269-02 1 CHASSIS, MODULE AVG7: ASSY
-2 333-A453-00 1 PANEL, REAR: AVG7, AL
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 2.5 SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1 MM L X 6.4 MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
CM
-6 174-B851-00 6 CABLE ASSY, RF: 75 OHM COAX (RG179), 5.5 CM L, BNC TO MCX
-7 211-A245-01 5 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC,
W/KOGATAMARU & LOCK WASHER
-8 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUTDRIVER, BOX: 14 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19 MM

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 6–27


AVG7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 6-15: AVG7 module exploded view

6–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video
Generator module
AWVG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the AWVG7 Analog Wideband Video Generator module. Refer
to Mainframe service overview for information about servicing the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the AWVG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the AWVG7 module, review the following information:
AWVG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

AWVG7 module service The service information for the AWVG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
AWVG7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 7-2, AWVG7 module
adjustment procedures.)

AWVG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the


module or block level. (See page 7-11.)
AWVG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the
module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 7-13.)
AWVG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 7-14.)
AWVG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the
removal of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules.
(See page 7-17.)
AWVG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the AWVG7 module by part number. (See page 7-19.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–1


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

AWVG7 module adjustment procedures


This section contains information needed to adjust the AWVG7 Generator module.
Adjustment in the AWVG7 Generator module are for the output offset and gain,
frame timing and clock timing, and frequency response.

Requirements for adjustment


Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The AWVG7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

WARNING. To avoid potential shock, use caution when removing


TG8000 mainframe top cover with power connected.

Access When adjusting the AWVG7 module, you need to remove the top cover of the
TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)

NOTE. If the serial number of your instrument is B010600 and above, replace the
resistor and capacitor numbers in the figures and procedures as follows:
R6xxx →R6xxx_1 (for example, R651A → R651A_1)
R7xxx → R6xxx_2 (for example, R751A → R651A_2)
R8xxx → R6xxx_3 (for example, R851A → R651A_3)
C6xxx → R6xxx_1 (for example, C604B → C604B_1)
C7xxx → R6xxx_2 (for example, C704B → C604B_2)
C8xxx → R6xxx_3 (for example, C804B → C604B_3)

7–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the output offset and
gain, frame timing and clock timing, and frequency response.

Table 7-1: Equipment required for AWVG7 module adjustment procedures


Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Oscilloscope 1 Bandwidth: 1 GHz or higher Function: Tektronix DPO70404
Mask testing
Digital multimeter 1 5 1/2 digits FLUKE 8842A
Peak detector amplifier 1 Tektronix part number 015-0408-00 and
TM500 series power supply
Peak detector head 1 Tektronix part number 015-0413-00
Probe 2 X 10 Tektronix P6139A
75 Ω BNC cable 2 Length: 72 inches Tektronix part number 012-0159-01
75 Ω BNC cable 1 5C-2V, 1 m Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
75 Ω feed-through termination 1 Tektronix part number 011-0103-02
75 Ω coaxial termination 1 Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female-to-dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter
BNC female-to-female 1 Canare BCJ-J
connector
Flat blade screwdriver for 1 Bit shape: 0.8X0.35 mm Murata KMDR060
adjusting C604B, C704B, and
C804B

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–3


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the output offset and gain


Preparation To perform the output offset and gain adjustment, you must first remove the top
cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the AWVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 7-1.)

Figure 7-1: Location of the variable resistors for the output offset and gain adjustment

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, BNC T connector, 75 Ω coaxial termination, and


BNC female-to-dual banana adapter to connect the upper CH 1 connector
on the AWVG7 module to the INPUT connector on the digital multimeter.
(See Figure 7-2.)

Figure 7-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the output offset and gain

7–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

2. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:


a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
3. Select the DAC Gain (GBR) : 0 mV calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (GBR),
and then press the ENTER button.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then press
the ENTER button.
4. Locate variable resistor R856A on the AWVG7 module circuit board. (See
Figure 7-1.)
5. Adjust R856A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
6. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 module.
7. Locate variable resistor R756A on the AWVG7 module circuit board. (See
Figure 7-1.)
8. Adjust R756A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 module.
10. Locate variable resistor R656A on the AWVG7 module circuit board. (See
Figure 7-1.)
11. Adjust R656A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
12. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 1
connector on the AWVG7 module.
13. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 700.397mV, and then
press the ENTER button.
14. Locate variable resistors R851A (coarse) and R851B (fine) on the AWVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 7-1.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–5


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

15. Adjust R851A and R851B so that the output gain is 700.4 mV ±1 mV.
16. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 module.
17. Locate variable resistors R751A (coarse) and R751B (fine) on the AWVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 7-1.)
18. Adjust R751A and R751B so that the output gain is 700.4 mV ±1 mV.
19. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 module.
20. Locate variable resistors R651A (coarse) and R651B (fine) on the AWVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 7-1.)
21. Adjust R651A and R651B so that the output gain is 700.4 mV ±1 mV.
22. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 3 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 module.
23. Select the DAC Gain (YPbPr) : 0 mV calibration signal for CH 2 and CH
3 as follows:
a. Press the BACK button to display the CALIBRATION menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Gain (YPbPr),
and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 0mV, and then press
the ENTER button.
24. Locate variable resistor R757A on the AWVG7 module circuit board. (See
Figure 7-1.)
25. Adjust R757A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
26. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 module.
27. Locate variable resistor R657A on the AWVG7 module circuit board. (See
Figure 7-1.)
28. Adjust R657A so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.

7–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the frequency response


Preparation To perform the frequency response adjustment, you must first remove the top
cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable capacitors on the AWVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 7-3.)

Figure 7-3: Location of the variable capacitors for the frequency response adjustment

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–7


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the two 75 Ω BNC cables, peak detector head, and BNC female-to-female
connector to connect the upper CH 1 connector on the AWVG7 module to the
+INPUT connector on the peak detector amplifier. (See Figure 7-4.)
2. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the OUTPUT connector on the peak
detector amplifier to the CH 1 input connector on the oscilloscope. (See
Figure 7-4.)

Figure 7-4: Equipment connection for adjusting the frequency response

7–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

3. Set the oscilloscope settings as indicated below:

Vertical scale CH 1: 5 mV/div


Bandwidth 250 MHz
Horizontal scale 5 ms/div
Trigger position 10%
Trigger source CH 1
Trigger type Edge
Trigger level –50 mV
Acquire menu Average 4

4. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:


a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
5. Select the DAC Test calibration signal as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the AWVG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select DAC Test, and then
press the ENTER button.
d. Press the ENTER button again to confirm the signal output.
6. Locate variable capacitors C804B, C704B, and C604B on the AWVG7
module circuit board. (See Figure 7-3.)
7. Turn the LEVEL knob on the peak detector amplifier so that the green LED
lights.
8. Adjust C804B so that the amplitude changes from 500 kHz to 20 MHz are at a
minimum. (See Figure 7-5.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–9


AWVG7 module adjustment procedures

Figure 7-5: Minimizing the amplitude changes


9. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 1 connector to the upper CH 2
connector on the AWVG7 module.
10. Adjust C704B so that the amplitude changes from 500 kHz to 20 MHz are at
a minimum.
11. Move the BNC cable from the upper CH 2 connector to the upper CH 3
connector on the AWVG7 module.
12. Adjust C604B so that the amplitude changes from 500 kHz to 20 MHz are at
a minimum.

7–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module theory of operation

AWVG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the
AWVG7 module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Line memory Line memory holds the actual sample points which define a digital signal.

Address generator This block consists of a frame delay, an MPU interface, a sequencer, an SDRAM
controller, and a blanking data generator. It interfaces the Frame Memory and
the Line Memory and controls the output sequence of the video data in these
memories.

Frame memory Frame memory contains a series of pointers that control the order the video lines
stored in the Line Memory are used to produce digital signals.

Overlay controller This block consists of an MPU interface and an overlay controller. It inserts data
from the Overlay Memory into the Line Memory data stream to create circular
patterns, ID text, and logo.

Overlay memory Overlay memory generates timings to multiplex the line memory data and the
overlay data used for a circle, ID text, and logo overlay.

D/A converter and amp This block consists of a D/A converter, two amplifiers, and a filter. It converts
the digital data from the Overlay Controller to analog signal and reconstruct the
signal for output.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–11


AWVG7 module theory of operation

Figure 7-6: Simplified block diagram of the AWVG7 module

7–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module interconnect diagram

AWVG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the AWVG7 module and how it interconnects with
the TG8000 mainframe.
Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections, such as power supply
and oscillator, can be found in the Mainfame diagrams section of this manual.
(See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the AWVG7 module is located in the AWVG7 module theory
of operation section. (See page 7-11.)

Figure 7-7: AWVG7 module interconnect diagram

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–13


AWVG7 module troubleshooting

AWVG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the AWVG7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the Mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 7-2: Equipment required for AWVG7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the troubleshooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

7–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module troubleshooting

AWVG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 7-8: AWVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–15


AWVG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 7-9: AWVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

7–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module removal and replacement

AWVG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the AWVG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 7-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of AWVG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors of the AWVG7 module
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older AWVG7 modules

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–17


AWVG7 module removal and replacement

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connector:
connectors 1. Use the Module installation and removal section to remove the AWVG7
module from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at J830A (upper CH 1), J830B (lower CH 1), J730A
(upper CH 2), J730B (lower CH 2), J630A (upper CH 3), and J630B (lower
CH 3) on the AWVG7 module circuit board.
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the five screws securing
the AWVG7 module circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from the chassis, and then place it on
a static free surface.
4. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
5. Carefully place the circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the five screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the rear-panel
connectors to the chassis.

7–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


AWVG7 module replaceable parts list

AWVG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the AWVG7 module.
Use this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or
servicing information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the
Mainframe replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the AWVG7 module.

Table 7-4: AWVG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
7-10- 116-A018-05 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: AWVG7
7-10-1 441-A269-02 1 CHASSIS, MODULE
-2 333-A454-00 1 PANEL, REAR, AL, AWVG7
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 2.5CM SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1MM LX6.4MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
-6 174-B851-00 6 CABLE ASSY, RF: 75 OHM COAX (RG179), 5.5CM L, BNC TO MCX
-7 211-A245-01 5 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC,
W/KOGATAMARU & LOCK WASHER
-8 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUTDRIVER, BOX: 14 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19 MM

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 7–19


AWVG7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 7-10: AWVG7 module exploded view

7–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 Black Generator module
BG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the BG7 Black Generator module. Refer to Mainframe service
overview for information about servicing the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the BG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the BG7 module, review the following information:
BG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

BG7 module service The service information for the BG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
BG7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 8-2, BG7 module
adjustment procedures.)

BG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module


or block level. (See page 8-8.)
BG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the
module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 8-9.)
BG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 8-10.)
BG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 8-13.)
BG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules of
the BG7 module by part number. (See page 8-15.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–1


BG7 module adjustment procedures

BG7 module adjustment procedures


Adjustment in the BG7 Generator module are for the output offset, output gain,
and chroma gain.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The BG7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Access When adjusting the blanking, luminance, and chrominance levels, you need to
remove the top cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the output offset, output
gain, and chroma gain.

Table 8-1: Equipment required for BG7 module adjustment procedures


Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital multimeter 1 5 1/2 digits FLUKE 8842A
Oscilloscope 1 Bandwidth: 1 GHz or higher Tektronix DPO70404C with TekConnect
75 Ω input TCA-75 adapter
75 Ω BNC cable 1 Length: 42 inches Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω coaxial terminator 1 75 Ω ±0.1% Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

8–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the output offset and gain


Preparation To perform the output offset and gain adjustment, you must first remove the top
cover of the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the BG7
circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)

Figure 8-1: BG7 module circuit board

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable, BNC T connector, 75 Ω coaxial terminator, and BNC
female-to-dual banana adapter to connect the BLACK 1 connector on the BG7
module to the input connector on the digital multimeter. (See Figure 8-2.)

Figure 8-2: Equipment connection for adjusting the BG7 output offset and gain

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–3


BG7 module adjustment procedures

2. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:


a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
3. Select the DAC Offset (0 V DC) calibration signal for BLACK 1 through
BLACK 4 as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the BG7 main menu.
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CAL : DAC Offset
(0 V DC), and then press the ENTER button.
e. Press the BACK button.
f. Repeat parts c through e of this step to select the calibration signal for
BLACK 2 through BLACK 4.
4. Locate variable resistor R491 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
5. Adjust R491 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
6. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 1 connector to the BLACK 2
connector on the BG7 module.
7. Locate variable resistor R591 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
8. Adjust R591 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
9. Change the BNC cable connection from BLACK 2 connector to the BLACK 3
connector on the BG7 module.
10. Locate variable resistor R691 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
11. Adjust R691 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.
12. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 3 connector to the
BLACK 4 connector on the BG7 module.
13. Locate variable resistor R791 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
14. Adjust R791 so that the output offset is 0 V ±1 mV.

8–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 module adjustment procedures

15. Select the DAC Gain (700 mV DC) calibration signal for BLACK 1 through
BLACK 4 as follows:
a. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select CAL : DAC Gain
(700mV DC), and then press the ENTER button.
c. Press the BACK button.
d. Repeat parts a through c of this step to select the calibration signal for
BLACK 2 through BLACK 4.
16. Locate variable resistor R481 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
17. Adjust R481 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
18. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 1 connector to the
BLACK 2 connector on the BG7 module.
19. Locate variable resistor R581 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
20. Adjust R581 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
21. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 2 connector to the
BLACK 3 connector on the BG7 module.
22. Locate variable resistor R681 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
23. Adjust R681 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.
24. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 3 connector to the
BLACK 4 connector on the BG7 module.
25. Locate variable resistor R781 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
26. Adjust R781 so that the output gain is 700 mV ±1 mV.

To adjust chroma gain (Option CB only)


Preparation To perform the chroma gain adjustment, you must first remove the top cover of
the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the BG7
circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–5


BG7 module adjustment procedures

Procedure

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

1. Use the 75 Ω BNC cable to connect the BLACK 3 connector on the BG7
Generator module to the CH 1 connector on the oscilloscope. (See Figure 8-3.)

Figure 8-3: Equipment connection for adjusting chroma gain


2. Select the 75% Color Bars (100% White) signal for BLACK 3 and BLACK
4 as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button to display the BG7 main menu.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 3, and then
press the ENTER button.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select PAL, and then press
the ENTER button.
d. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TEST SIGNAL.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 75% Color Bars
(100% White), and then press the ENTER button.
f. Press the BACK button twice to return the module main menu.
g. Repeat parts b through e of this step to select the 75% Color Bars signal
for BLACK 4.

8–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 module adjustment procedures

3. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:


Vertical: 100 mV / div
Sample depth: 100 K
Horizontal: 2.5 μs / div
Trigger position: 50%
Vert offset: 700 mV
Trigger: 720 mV, rising edge
Hold-off: 63 μs
4. After you see a stable trace on the oscilloscope, change the Vertical setting to
5 mV / div.
5. Locate the flat bar followed by the burst packets for yellow and cyan as
shown below.

Figure 8-4: Triggered display for adjusting the BG7 module chroma gain
6. Locate variable resistor R927 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
7. Adjust R927 to match the level of the first chroma packet to the preceding
75% flat bar.
8. Change the BNC cable connection from the BLACK 3 connector to the
BLACK 4 connector on the BG7 module.
9. Locate variable resistor R977 on the BG7 circuit board. (See Figure 8-1.)
10. Adjust R977 to match the first chroma packet to the level of the preceding
75% flat bar.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–7


BG7 module theory of operation

BG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the BG7
module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Sync generator The block creates the digital data of NTSC/PAL black burst signal or HDTV
trilevel sync signal. When optional memories are added, sync generator 3 and 4
can also generate 10 field ID and NTSC/PAL color bar signals.

D/A converter and amp The block consists of a D/A converter, two amplifiers, and two filters (one is for
NTSC/PAL and another is for HD). The D/A converter converts the digital data
from the Sync Generator to an analog signal and reconstructs the signal for output.

Figure 8-5: Simplified block diagram of the BG7 module

8–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 module interconnect diagram

BG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the BG7 module and how it interconnects with the
TG8000 mainframe. Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections,
such as power supply and oscillator, can be found in the Mainframe diagrams
section of this manual. (See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the BG7 Generator module is located in the BG7 module
theory of operation section. (See page 8-8, BG7 module theory of operation.)

Figure 8-6: BG7 module interconnect diagram

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–9


BG7 module troubleshooting

BG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the BG7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the Mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 8-2: Equipment required for BG7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the trouble shooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

8–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 module troubleshooting

BG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 8-7: BG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–11


BG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 8-8: BG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

8–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 module removal and replacement

BG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the BG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 8-3: Required tools for removal and replacement of BG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screws
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screws
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors of the BG7 module
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older BG7 modules

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–13


BG7 module removal and replacement

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connector:
connectors 1. Use the Module installation and removal section to remove the BG7 module
from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at P830 (BLACK 1), J880 (BLACK 2), J930 (BLACK
3) and J980 (BLACK 4) on the BG7 circuit board.
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the six screws securing
the BG7 circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from chassis, and then place it on a static
free surface.
4. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
5. Carefully place the circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the five screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the rear-panel
connectors to the chassis.

8–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


BG7 module replaceable parts list

BG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the BG7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the Mainframe
replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the BG7 module.

Table 8-4: BG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
8-9- 116-A003-04 NA 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: BG7
116-1169-00 NA 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: BG7
116-A004-04 NA 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: BG7-CB
116-1170-00 NA 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: BG7-CB
8-9-1 441-A269-02 1 CHASSIS, MODULE AGL7: ASSY
-2 333-A406-00 1 PANEL, REAR: BG7, AL
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 2.5 SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1 MM LX6.4 MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
CM
-6 174-B851-00 4 CABLE ASSY, RF: 75 OHM COAX (RG179), 5.5 CM L, BNC TO MCX
-7 211-A245-01 5 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC,
W/KOGATAMARU & LOCK WASHER
-8 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUTDRIVER, BOX: 14 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19 MM

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 8–15


BG7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 8-9: BG7 module exploded view

8–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 Digital Video Generator module
DVG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the DVG7 Digital Video Generator module. Refer to Mainframe
service overview for information about servicing the TG8000 mainframe. (See
page 2-1.)
If the DVG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the DVG7 module, review the following information:
DVG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

DVG7 module service The service information for the DVG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
DVG7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 9-2.)

DVG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module


or block level. (See page 9-10.)
DVG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the
module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 9-12.)
DVG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 9-13.)
DVG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 9-16.)
DVG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the DVG7 module by part number. (See page 9-18.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–1


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

DVG7 module adjustment procedures


The only adjustment in the DVG7 module is for the output level.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The DVG7 Generator module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to
+30 °C environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Access When adjusting the output level, you need to remove the top cover of the
TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the output level.

Table 9-1: Equipment required for the DVG7 module adjustment procedures
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital signal analyzer 1 Digital signal analyzer with a 20 GHz Tektronix DSA8200 with an 80E04
electrical sampling module and a probe electrical sampling module and an
interface module 80A03 Tek Connect Probe Interface
module
Stable 10 kHz sine wave 1 CW sine wave with 800 mVp-p ±5% Tektronix AFG3101
generator into 75 Ω, THD < 60 dBc, 10 kHz, and
<50 mV DC offset
Tekconnect 75 Ω to 50 Ω 1 Tektronix TCA75
adapter with BNC input
connector
Precision RMS voltmeter 1 Keithley 2700 DMM
6 dB SMA attenuator 1 Tektronix part number 015-1001-01
SMA (male) to BNC (female) Tektronix part number 015-0554-00
adapter
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 1 Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
high-bandwidth cable

9–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

Table 9-1: Equipment required for the DVG7 module adjustment procedures (cont.)
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 50 Ω 1 Tektronix part number 012-0057-01
cable
75 Ω precision terminator 1 75 Ω ±0.1% Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

To adjust the output level


Preparation To perform the output level adjustment, you must first remove the top cover of
the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the DVG7
circuit board. (See Figure 9-1.)

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

Figure 9-1: DVG7 module circuit board

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–3


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

NOTE. Before adjusting the DVG7 output amplitude, you must first characterize
the test system amplitude.

To characterize the test There are two parts to the amplitude characterization:
system amplitude Part A: Sets up a characterization reference to the DMM.
Part B: Characterizes the test system.

Part A: Characterize the Reference against the DMM.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. One end of a 1 m high bandwidth cable to the AFG3101 output.
b. The other end of the 1 m cable to the BNC T.
c. The BNC T to a BNC to banana adapter.
d. The other end of the BNC T to a precision terminator.
e. The end of the banana adapter to the input of the DMM.
2. Set the AFG3101 to output a sine wave into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
3. Set the AFG3101 to a 10 kHz output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
4. Set the AFG3101 to a 800 mVp-p output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
5. Check that the output of the AFG3101 is On.
6. Set the DMM to measure AC voltage using a medium filter setting. Set the
range to allow for four digits of RMS amplitude.
7. Record the DMM measurement in the DVG7 output amplitude table. (See
Table 9-2 on page 9-7.)

Set up the digital signal analyzer.

CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge can damage the oscilloscope modules. To


prevent damage, always work in a static free environment and discharge the
static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while
handling these modules.

1. Install the 80A03 output cable into the Channel 1/2 slot of the oscilloscope.
2. Install the 80E04 sampling head into the 80A03 adapter and connect the two
using the SMA cables.
3. Install the TCA-75 into the left port of the 80A03.
4. Install the TCA-BNC into the right port of the 80A03.

9–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

5. If needed, press the Default Settings button on the oscilloscope.


6. Press the Channel 1 button on the 80E04 sampling head to activate Channel 1.

Part B: Characterize the test system.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. AFG3101 output to 1 m high bandwidth cable.
b. The other end of the cable to a TCA-75.
c. The TCA-75 to the 80A03 in the oscilloscope and plug-in.
d. A 50 Ω cable from the AFG3101 trigger output.
e. The other end of the 50 Ω cable to the BNC to SMA adapter.
f. The SMA adapter to the 6 dB pad.
g. The 6 dB pad to the trigger direct input on the oscilloscope.
2. Keep the AFG3101 at the same output as in Part A of this test.
3. Set the oscilloscope:
Time/Div: 20 μs
Volts/Div: 50 mV
Averaging: 16
Record Length: 4000 points
4. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 1 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle RMS.
5. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 2 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle Mean.
6. Record the Cycle RMS and Cycle Mean values in the DVG7 output amplitude
table.
7. Calculate the corrected RMS amplitude of the sine
wave:
8. Record the result in the test record.
9. Calculate the total attenuation factor for the system. This is the DMM
measurement divided by the corrected RMS sine wave amplitude. This
attenuation factor will be used after measuring the signal outputs in the next
test.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–5


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

10. Record the attenuation factor value in the DVG7 output amplitude table.
11. Enter the attenuation factor value into the oscilloscope:
a. On the oscilloscope, press the SETUP DIALOG button.
b. Select the “Vert” tab from the top of the setup page.
c. Select the “External Attenuation” box, and then enter the attenuation
factor calculated in step 9 above.

9–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

DVG7 output amplitude adjustment table. Print this table for use during the
adjustment procedure.

Table 9-2: DVG7 output amplitude


Minimum Value Maximum
Characterization
DMM Measurement —— ——
(typically 0.2880 V)
Oscilloscope Cycle RMS —— ——
(typically 116 mV)
Oscilloscope Cycle Mean —— ——
(typically 1 mV)
Sine wave RMS amplitude ——
(typically 116 mV)
Attenuation Factor 2.35 2.55
Adjustment Record Value
Minimum Before adjustment After adjustment Maximum
Signal 1 amplitude
Measured value (μ) 720 mV 880 mV
with attenuation
Black 1 amplitude
(Option BK only) 720 mV 880 mV
Measured value (μ)
with attenuation

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–7


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the DVG7 output Use this procedure to adjust the DVG7 output amplitude:
amplitude 1. Set the DVG7 module for a 75% Color Bar signal output:
a. On the TG8000, press the MODULE button until the DVG7 module
main menu is displayed.
b. Press the BARS button until 75% Color Bars is displayed.
c. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
2. Connect a 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the SIGNAL 1 output of the
module to the TCA75 BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
3. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the SIGNAL 2 output on the DVG7 module
(through the BNC to SMA adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the
trigger direct input on a sampling oscilloscope.
4. If necessary, set the oscilloscope as follows:
Time/Div: 2 ns
Volts/Div: 100 mV
Averaging: 1
Record Length: 4000 points
5. On the scope, select Measurement 3, Pulse-Amplitude, and then Amplitude to
measure the amplitude on the flat part of the long pulse.
6. Right click on the measurement readout, and select Show Statistics and Show
Annotations from the pop-up menu.
7. Note the expected average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, displayed
on the oscilloscope.
8. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
9. Record the average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, in the Signal 1
amplitude row Before adjustment value column of the DVG7 output amplitude
table.

NOTE. If you entered the attenuation factor into the scope at the end of
the amplitude characterization procedure, then the scope will display the
multiplication result.

10. Locate variable resistor R507 on the DVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 9-1.)
11. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
12. Adjust R507 so that the signal amplitude is equal to the height noted in step 7.

9–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module adjustment procedures

13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 until the average attenuation measured value (μ) is
within 1 mV of the corrected attenuation value.
14. Record the new measured attenuation corrected value in the Signal 1
amplitude row After adjustment value column of the DVG7 output amplitude
table.
15. Option BK only: Adjust the BLACK 1 output amplitude as follows:
a. On the DVG7, move the cable from the SIGNAL 1 output to the
BLACK 1 output.
b. On the DVG7, move the cable from the SIGNAL 2 output to the
BLACK 2 output.
c. Locate variable resistor R807 on the DVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 9-1.)
d. Repeat steps 7 through 14 for the BLACK 1 output using R807 to adjust
the amplitude.
This completes the output level adjustment procedures.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–9


DVG7 module theory of operation

DVG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the DVG7
module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Address generator This block consists of a frame delay, an MPU interface, a sequencer, an SDRAM
controller, and a blanking data generator. It interfaces the Frame Memory and
the Line Memory and controls the output sequence of the video data in these
memories.

Frame memory The frame memory contains a series of pointers that control the order the video
lines stored in Line Memory are used to produce the serial digital signals.

Line memory The memory holds the actual sample points that define a serial digital signal.

Overlay controller This block consists of an MPU interface and an overlay controller. It inserts data
from the Overlay Memory into the Line Memory data stream to create circular
patterns, ID text, and logo.

Overlay memory The memory generates timings to multiplex the line memory data and the overlay
data used for a circle, ID text, and logo overlay.

Formatter This block consists of an audio control packet generator, a data packet generator,
an MPU interface, and an SRAM controller. The formatter inserts embedded
audio data in serial digital signals.

Audio memory The memory contains embedded audio data.

Serializer This block converts a 10 bits parallel data to SDI signal.

Black generator (Option This block generates black or gray (40% gray) signal for the BLACK 1 and
BK only) BLACK 2 outputs.

9–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module theory of operation

Figure 9-2: Simplified block diagram of the DVG7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–11


DVG7 module interconnect diagram

DVG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the DVG7 module and how it interconnects with
the TG8000 mainframe.
Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections, such as power supply
and oscillator, can be found in the Mainframe diagrams section of this manual.
(See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the DVG7 module is located in the DVG7 module theory
of operation section. (See page 9-10.)

Figure 9-3: DVG7 module interconnect diagram

9–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module troubleshooting

DVG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the DVG7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the Mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 9-3: Equipment required for DVG7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the troubleshooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–13


DVG7 module troubleshooting

DVG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 9-4: DVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

9–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 9-5: DVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–15


DVG7 module removal and replacement

DVG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the DVG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 9-4: Required tools for removal and replacement of DVG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors of the DVG7 module
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older DVG7 modules

9–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module removal and replacement

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connector:
connectors 1. Use the Module installation and removal section to remove the DVG7 module
from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at P500 (SIGNAL 1) and P502 (SIGNAL 2) on the
DVG7 circuit board. If Option BK is installed, also disconnect the cables at
J800 (BLACK 1) and J802 (BLACK 2).
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the six screws securing the
DVG7 circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from chassis, and then place it on a static
free surface.
4. If Option BK is installed, skip this step:
a. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the two screws securing
the rear panel to the chassis.
5. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
6. If Option BK is installed, skip this step:
a. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the two screws securing
the rear panel to the chassis.
7. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the six screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–17


DVG7 module replaceable parts list

DVG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the DVG7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the Mainframe
replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the DVG7 module.

Table 9-5: DVG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
9-6- 116-A005-09 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: DVG7
116-A006-09 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: DVG7-BK
9-6-1 441-A273-03 1 CHASSIS, MODULE DVG7: ASSY
-2 333-A407-00 1 PANEL, REAR: DVG7, AL
333-A408-00 1 PANEL, REAR: DVG7 OPTION, AL
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 2.5 SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1MM LX6.4MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
CM
-6 174-B846-00 2 CABLE ASSY, RF:75 OHM, COAX (RG179), 6 CM L, BNC TO PL71-LP-1.5C
174-B846-00 4 CABLE ASSY, RF:75 OHM, COAX (RG179), 6 CM L, BNC TO PL71-LP-1.5C
(OPTION BK)
-7 211-A245-01 8 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC,
W/KOGATAMARU & LOCK WASHER
211-A245-01 6 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC,
W/KOGATAMARU & LOCK WASHER (OPTION BK)
-8 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUT DRIVER, BOX: 14 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19 MM

9–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


DVG7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 9-6: DVG7 module exploded view

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 9–19


DVG7 module replaceable parts list

9–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 GPS Synchronization and
Timecode module
GPS7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the GPS7 GPS Synchronization and Timecode module. Refer
to Mainframe service overview for information about servicing the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the GPS7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the GPS7 module, review the following information:
GPS7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

GPS7 module service The service information for the GPS7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
GPS7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 10-2.)

GPS7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module


or block level. (See page 10-5.)
GPS7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 10-8.)
GPS7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 10-23.)
GPS7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the GPS7 module by part number. (See page 10-26.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–1


GPS7 module adjustment procedures

GPS7 module adjustment procedures


The GPS7 module has multiple adjustments associated with it, both to the module
(Black Burst Amplitude and Black Burst Offset) and to the mainframe master
clock frequency.
Refer to Mainframe adjustment procedures for instructions on how to adjust the
mainframe master clock using the GPS7 module. (See page 2-2, Mainframe clock
adjustment.)

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The GPS7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. An external antenna or GPS signal must be
connected during the warm-up time. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to perform the adjustments
needed for this module.

Table 10-1: Equipment required for the GPS7 module adjustment procedures
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital multimeter 1 5 1/2 digits FLUKE 8842A
75 Ω BNC cable 1 Length: 42 inches Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
75 Ω coaxial precision 1 75 Ω ±0.1% Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
terminator
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

10–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust black burst level and offset


Perform the following procedure to adjust the GPS7 module black burst level
and offset.
1. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
2. Connect the Black 1 output to the multimeter as shown. (See Figure 10-1.)

Figure 10-1: Equipment connections for GPS7 module adjustments


3. Press the MODULE button to display the GPS7 main menu.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–3


GPS7 module adjustment procedures

4. Set the Black level:


a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select BLACK 1, and then
press the ENTER button.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select AMPLITUDE
CALIBRATION, and then press the ENTER button.
e. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the 0 mV signal.
f. Make a note of the voltmeter reading.
g. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the 700 mV signal.
h. Make a note of the voltmeter reading.
i. Subtract the voltage measured in part e. of this step (0 mV setting) from
the voltage measured in part g of this step (700 mV setting).
j. If the result is <698 mV or >702 mV, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
buttons to adjust the gain.
k. Repeat parts d through i of this step until the difference between the two
signals is 700 mV ± 2 mV.
l. Press the ENTER button to save the setting and exit the amplitude
calibration menu.
5. Set Black offset:
a. Proceeding from the previous step, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow
button to select Offset Calibration, and then press the ENTER button.
b. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the 0 mV signal.
c. Measure the offset voltage.
d. If necessary, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to adjust the
offset voltage to 0 V ±5 mV.
e. Press the ENTER button to save the setting and exit the offset calibration
menu.
6. Move the cable to the next output and repeat steps 3 through 5 for the
BLACK 2 and BLACK 3 outputs.

10–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module theory of operation

GPS7 module theory of operation


The GPS7 module is a GPS and genlock synchronization module with a timecode
reader and generator. This section describes the basic operation of the major
circuit blocks in the GPS7 module. (See Figure 10-2.)
All access to the GPS7 module occurs through the address and data busses, shown
as the CPU I/O bus. The interface is a PLD on the GPS7 module, which is the
central control interface for MCU data transactions to and from the GPS7 module.

Antenna connector The GPS7 module requires an external antenna to receive the GPS time signals
from up to 12 satellites. The antenna connector applies these signals to the GPS
Receiver board.

GPS receiver loop The GPS Receiver board block is a Trimble Resolution-T module, which can
track up to 12 satellites, and extract and average the time information from them.
The GPS receiver produces a pulse at the rate of 1 pulse per second (PPS) which
is compared to a locally generated pulse per second (Local 1 PPS) in the Phase
Detector block. The output from the Phase Detector contains a Quantization
Error due to the time sampling method used in the GPS receiver board. The GPS
receiver also produces a serial data stream detailing the error (which can be
up to 20 ns) that is arithmetically removed from the phase detector output (the
Quantize Correction path). This corrected phase detector output can be seen on
the module diagnostic display.
The corrected phase is first filtered in the averaging and loop control block, and
then read by software. The software then writes this to a synthesizer on the
TG8000 mainframe board to control the frequency of the mainframe master
54 MHz clock. This frequency control value can also be seen on the module
diagnostic display. The mainframe 54 MHz oscillator clocks the GPS7 Master
Time of Day (MTOD) counter. This completes the loop, spread over the two
boards, locking the mainframe oven and MTOD counter to the incoming GPS.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–5


GPS7 module theory of operation

Genlock control loop When in Genlock mode, the Black 1 output is turned off and the BNC is used as
an input. The input reference video is buffered then drives a sync separator and an
Analog to Digital Converter (ADC). The sync signals allow the Genlock logic
to roughly align the internal sync to the incoming video. The sync signal also
allows the genlock logic to window on the ADC samples from the sync edge
or the burst. The samples are read by the SW which then "closes the loop" by
writing to the DAC that controls the OCXO. This sets the phase and frequency of
all the internal clocks.
The Genlock Control Loop is only available on GPS7 modules with the REF IN
connector on the rear panel.

MTOD clock The Master Time of Day (MTOD) clock contains the precise current time, which
is phase locked to the selected time source. The MTOD is used for all time code
generation and positioning of the frame reset pulses.

Outputs The three Black Generation Engines and the four LTC engines each receive one
of three frame reset pulses from the TG8000 mainframe, which lock the video
frames in all engines to exact references based on MTOD.
In order for many units to have the same phase when locked to GPS, the instrument
times the frame pulses to an “Epoch.” This means they are timed as though they
all started on the time indicated by TAI and the proposed SMPTE time of GMT
midnight (00:00:00) on January 1st 1958. The video sequences generated by the
GPS7 are set to the correct time by calculating the total time from the SMPTE
epoch to the present, and adjusting the frame reset pulses accordingly. The frame
reset pulses are used to reset the video generation outputs start position in time.
The GPS7 has 1 GPI (General Purpose Interface) input and 2 GPI outputs that can
be set up for event triggering or detection as configured by the user. These are
under SW control via FPGA registers.

Time code reader The time code reader operates on the same ADC data as the genlock. This data is
processed to extract the VITC bits and check for valid CRC and continuity. When
valid time code is detected, the SW reads the time values from the reader circuits.
The Time Code Reader is only available on GPS7 modules with the REF IN
connector on the rear panel.

10–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module theory of operation

Figure 10-2: Simplified block diagram of the GPS7 module

NOTE. The time code reader and genlock circuitry is only available on
GPS7 modules with the REF IN connector on the rear panel.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–7


GPS7 module troubleshooting

GPS7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the
GPS7 module. These procedures help you decide whether it is necessary to
replace your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the Mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed below is needed to troubleshoot the GPS7 module.

Table 10-2: Equipment required for GPS7 module troubleshooting


Equipment Requirement Suggested equipment
TG8000 mainframe For the GPS7 module under test Tektronix TG8000
TG8000 mainframe with GPS7 installed Fully functional, operating system, for Tektronix TG8000 with GPS7 module
reference
Waveform monitor Used to verify correct GPS phase lock Tektronix WFM7120
operation. Must be able to lock to a
reference and display composite inputs
GPS Antenna signal source (2) Good GPS signal required for both the
GPS7 under test and the reference unit.
If only one antenna feed is available, a
signal splitter may be used
Digital Multimeter Used to check power supply voltages and Fluke 87 or equivalent
fuses
75 Ω BNC cables (4) Length: 42 inches, used to connect the Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
instruments
ROHS compliant ESD safe soldering The GPS7 boards do not contain any
workstation user-serviceable parts, but any soldering
must be ROHS compliant
Frequency Counter (optional) Used for an alternate method to check Fluke PM6685 or equivalent
frequency accuracy

10–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Problem identification
If there is a problem, first perform the GPS7 Performance Verification procedure,
found in the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification manual,
available on the Web at www.tektronix.com/manuals. Any problems found with
that procedure can be a starting point for troubleshooting.
General problems and actions to follow are shown in the following table. (See
Table 10-3.)

Table 10-3: GPS7 module troubleshooting


Problem Actions
• Fails Power On Self Test (POST) • Verify the GPS7 module is installed in slot 1 of the mainframe.
• GPS7 does not appear in menu • Run power on test procedure. (See page 10-11, Power on self test.)
• Check for current software. (See page 10-11, Check the installed firmware version.)
• Run power supply test. (See page 10-14, Power supply test.)
• Swap the module with a known good GPS7 module and try again.
• GPS7 does not lock • Run power on test procedure. (See page 10-11, Power on self test.)
• GPS7 does not acquire satellite • Check DC antenna power voltage. (See page 10-18, DC antenna output power voltage.)
• Check GPS antenna signal source. (See page 10-12, Check the GPS antenna signal source.)
• Check diagnostics reported values. (See page 10-13, Check diagnostic reported values.)
• Swap the module with a known good GPS7 module and try again.
• Unstable GPS lock (determined • Verify 20 minute warm-up, then recheck stability relative to reference unit.
by Performance Verification or • Check GPS antenna signal source. (See page 10-12, Check the GPS antenna signal source.)
through normal use)
• Verify configuration. (See page 10-12, Verify the configuration.)
• Check diagnostics reported values. (See page 10-13, Check diagnostic reported values.)
• Run Internal Mode Oven test. (See page 10-19, Internal mode oven test.)
• If both units have not acquired position, run Acquire New Position procedure.
• Frame phase wrong (determined • Verify configuration. (See page 10-12, Verify the configuration.)
by Performance Verification • Check time zone offset configuration and time of day source. See the TG8000 User manual
• Time of Day wrong for directions.
• Check diagnostics reported values. (See page 10-13, Check diagnostic reported values.)
• Run Acquire New Position procedure. (See page 10-17, Acquire new position.)
• No Black Burst outputs • Run power supply test.
• No LTC outputs • Verify configuration. (See page 10-12, Verify the configuration.)
• Check diagnostics reported values. (See page 10-13, Check diagnostic reported values.)
• Swap modules/mainframes.
• If no other problem found, replace the GPS7 module.
• Long GPS lock time • Check GPS antenna signal source. (See page 10-12, Check the GPS antenna signal source.)
• Adjust oven oscillator. (See page 10-17, Oven oscillator frequency adjustment.)
• Verify configuration. (See page 10-12, Verify the configuration.)
• Check diagnostics reported values. (See page 10-13, Check diagnostic reported values.)
• If no other problem found, replace the GPS7 module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–9


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Table 10-3: GPS7 module troubleshooting (cont.)


Problem Actions
• Unstable genlock or unable to • Run Internal Mode Oven test. (See page 10-19, Internal mode oven test.)
genlock • Check GPS7 reference select is set to correct mode. See the TG8000 User manual for
directions.
• Verify reference signal is valid and is the correct format. Use a WFM7120 or WFM8300
waveform monitor.
• Check ADC Bus diagnostics. (See page 10-20, ADC bus diagnostics.)
• Run Loop Out Reference test. (See page 10-21, Loop output reference test.)
• Swap modules/mainframes.
• If no other problem found, replace the GPS7 module.
• Unable to detect or use timecode • Verify timecode is present on the input signal. Use a WFM7120 or WFM8300 waveform
monitor.
• Verify GPS7 time source select is set to VITC. See the TG8000 User manual for directions.
• Verify GPS7 time sync method is set as needed. The “Follow” mode is best for troubleshooting
purposes. See the TG8000 User manual for directions.
• Check the GPS7 status menu for the Genlock input amplitude and VITC present indicators.
See the TG8000 User manual for directions.
• Run Loop Out Reference test. (See page 10-21, Loop output reference test.)
• Swap modules/mainframes.
• If no other problem found, replace the GPS7 module.

10–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Troubleshooting procedures
Power on self test When you first apply power to a TG8000, it runs a Power On Self Test (POST).
If an error is encountered during this POST the display will show one of several
error codes. (See Table 10-4.) Watch the display during boot up and note any
error codes.

Table 10-4: POST error codes


Error
Code Meaning Action
1: CPLD constant 1 check (0xAAAA or 0x00AA based on cpld version at addr 0x8) Try another GPS7 module in
2: CPLD constant 2 check (0x5555 or 0x0055 based on cpld version at addr 0xA) the mainframe slot 1. If you
3: CPLD R/W error (writes 0x5555 to addr 0x102 and confirms) do not have another module,
4: CPLD R/W error (writes 0xAAAA to addr 0x102 and confirms) or if the 2nd module does not
5: Error copying DO Fpga to GPS7 EEPROM show an error code, return the
7: Error copying BB Fpga to GPS7 EEPROM GPS7 module for repair
9: DO Fpga constant check (0x55 at addr 0x501000)
10: DO Fpga R/W error (writes 0x5555 to addr 0x501024 and confirms)
11: DO Fpga R/W error (writes 0xAAAA to addr 0x501024 and confirms)
12: BB Fpga R/W error (writes 0x5555 to addr 0x400008 and confirms)
13: BB Fpga R/W error (writes 0xAAAA to addr 0x400008 and confirms)
14: DO fpga Trimble Module communications error - GPS receiver is disconnected or failed
255: Not an error. This code may appear following some firmware updates. No action

Check the installed Use this procedure to check the installed firmware versions:
firmware version 1. Access the UTILITY menu.
a. From the TG8000 main menu, press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
buttons to select UTILITY.
b. Press the ENTER button to enter the utility submenu.
2. Access the Software Version information.
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select VERSION INFO
(F/W).
b. Read the firmware version.
3. If the CPU is not Version 1.1 or later, then install current software. The latest
software is available on the Web at www.tektronix.com/downloads.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–11


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Verify the configuration Before beginning any of these procedures, the GPS7 under test and the GPS7
reference unit must be configured to correctly use the GPS signal. If they do not
have the correct configuration it will cause problems while troubleshooting.
The best way to ensure a common setup is to set both instruments to the factory
presets:
1. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears.
2. Press ENTER to select PRESET.
3. If needed, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select Recall.
4. Press the left (◄) arrow button until Factory Preset appears.
5. Press the ENTER button to load the preset.
6. When loading is complete, press the BACK button to exit the Factory Default
menu.
When finished troubleshooting, disconnect and reconnect the power cord, to cycle
the power. This will return the unit(s) to the user settings that were in effect before
invoking the factory presets.

Check the GPS antenna For proper operation, an outside antenna signal source must be connected to the
signal source GPS7 module, and functioning correctly. If a sufficient signal is not applied to the
antenna connector, the GPS7 module will not operate properly. Use this procedure
to verify the antenna signal:
1. Press the MODULE button to select GPS7 [1].
2. If necessary, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select STATUS.
3. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select Signal Quality.
Wait for the Signal Quality readout to stabilize. This may take several minutes.
4. Check Signal Quality and Sats.
5. If signal quality is ≥30 and the number of detected satellites is ≥4, then end
this test. If not, then continue.
6. If the GPS7 module under test is the antenna power source, check that the
GPS7 module is set to the correct antenna voltage:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select GPS SETUP.
b. Press the ENTER button to enter the setup submenu.
c. If necessary, use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select
ANTENNA POWER.

10–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module troubleshooting

d. Check for proper antenna power setting.


e. Check the Antenna Power LED. If the LED is red or blinking green,
check for a problem with the antenna or the cabling system, such as an RF
splitter that blocks or short circuits the antenna power DC voltage.
7. Check the DC antenna output power voltage. (See page 10-18, DC antenna
output power voltage.)
8. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of this procedure for the reference unit. If the
reference unit passes, then exchange antenna feeds between the reference unit
and the GPS7 unit under test and retest the GPS7 unit under test.
9. If the GPS7 unit under test does not receive a GPS signal on a known, good,
antenna, then replace the GPS7 module.

Check diagnostic reported There are several internally detected physical measurements which are reported
values by the GPS7 module. Check the following (see the TG8000 User manual for
detailed procedures).
Temperature: Temperature is detected on the Trimble GPS receiver board.
This temperature is normally about 15 °C above ambient temperature. If the
temperature is very high or low, check that the fan is operating, the installation
clearances are correct, and that all cables in the GPS7 module are connected
properly. If there is still a problem, replace the GPS7 module.
Tune – Phase: The Phase value indicates the second by second differences
between the Pulse per Second (PPS) signal from the GPS receiver and the
Local 1 PPS signal from the Master Time of Day clock. At lock this signal
should be near hex 8000 0000.
Tune – DDS: The DDS value is the control word the processor has written to
the clock synthesizer. In internal mode, this is the calibration value needed to
compensate for the any small error in the the master oven frequency. When
locked to a reference such as video or GPS, the DDS value is the value needed
to track the reference signal frequency. The valid range of the DDS word is 0
to 4,194,303. If the DDS word is near either end of this range, then the system
is near the frequency limits to which it can lock.
Voltage Mon 1 (+5V, +8V), Voltage Mon 2 (-5V rel to +3.3V): The voltage
monitors measure the mainframe supplies, If the display indicates they are
out of range, then check them manually. (See page 10-14, Power supply
test.) If one of these supplies is bad, then replace the Main board. If manual
measurement shows that the supplies are correct, then the GPS7 module is not
measuring them correctly. Replace the GPS7 module.
PHASE DET RAMPS (Up: A, Up: B), PHASE DET RAMPS (Down: A,
Down: B): These four values show critical values in the phase detector. The
values may vary from unit to unit, as a result of the auto-calibration that
adjusts them, but if all the power supplies are good and any of the ramp
diagnostics indicate “WARN” (for Warning), then replace the GPS7 module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–13


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Power supply test There are two types of power supplies in the GPS7 module; those supplied by the
TG8000 mainframe and those that are derived on the GPS7 from the mainframe
supplies. The ones supplied by the mainframe are fused on the GPS7 module; they
have an 'M' at the start of the supply name. (See Table 10-5.) Derived supplies
depend on the mainframe supply fuses for protection.

Access. To perform the power supply tests you must first remove the TG8000 top
cover. (See page 2-25, Top cover.) Then use the following flowchart and table
of power supply test points to determine if the GPS7 power supply is operating
correctly. (See Figure 10-3.) (See Table 10-5.)

Figure 10-3: GPS7 power supply test

10–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Table 10-5: Power supply test points


Test point Supply name Limits Notes
Mainframe supplies
TP111 M+5VD +4.75 V to +5.25 V Mainframe Fused 5 V digital supply, fuse
F132
TP211 M+3.3V +3.1 V to +3.5 V Mainframe Fused 3.3 V digital supply,
fuse F131
TP213 M–5VA –4.75 V to –5.25 V Mainframe Fused –5 V analog supply,
fuse F111
TP214 M+5VA +4.75 V to +5.25 V Mainframe Fused +5 V analog supply,
fuse F121
TP215 M+8V +7.6 V to +8.4 V Mainframe Fused +8 V analog supply,
fuse F122
Derived supplies
TP311 ANT+5V 0 to 5.8 V Switched GPS antenna supply – user
setup
TP411 RAMP+7V 6.75 V to 7.25 V Derived from M+8V
TP511 RAMP-4V -4.25 V to -3.75 V Derived from M-5V
TP711 CIR+2.5V 2.375 V to 2.625 V Derived from M+3.3V
TP911 VID+4.1 4.08 V to 4.11 V Derived from M+5VA
TP821 LTC+3.3V 3.30 V to 3.39 V Derived from M+5VA
TP0821 BB+1.2V 1.15 V to 1.25 V Derived from M+3.3V
TP0421 DO+1.2V 1.15 V to 1.25 V Derived from M+3.3V, test point is under
Trimble GPS receiver board

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–15


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Figure 10-4: GPS7 voltage test point and fuse locations

10–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Oven oscillator frequency The oven oscillator frequency adjustment saves the current tune voltage for
adjustment the oven. This will be used when the instrument is in “internal” mode. If the
instrument is locked to a GPS signal, this should be done periodically to account
for crystal drift. This adjustment can be done without any disruption to operation,
and is best done in the instrument's operating environment. This adjustment can
be done without putting the instrument into Factory Mode, so the instrument
does not have to be taken out of service.
To adjust the oven oscillator frequency, perform the adjustment procedure. (See
page 2-5, To adjust the master clock using an installed GPS7 module.)

Acquire new position The GPS7 module must have a valid 3D GPS position to properly lock to GPS
time. If the GPS antenna is moved, a new position must be acquired for correct
time information. There must be a good antenna feed, and the GPS receiver must
be locked to at least four GPS satellites for this procedure to complete successfully.
The unit will require approximately 60 seconds to acquire a new position.
1. Navigate to GPS7:GPS SETUP:ACQUIRE POSITION, and then press the
ENTER button.
2. Select GPS7:STATUS.
3. Wait until the status display shows Locked.
4. This process requires four satellites to complete successfully. If the signal is
marginal the acquisition may take longer. If the signal is poor, or if there is no
signal, the acquisition will not finish.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–17


GPS7 module troubleshooting

DC antenna output power The GPS7 module is capable of providing power to a GPS antenna. Use this
voltage procedure to verify that the GPS7 module is providing power correctly.
1. Disconnect the antenna from the GPS7 module.
2. Connect the voltmeter to the GPS7 Antenna input, using a coaxial cable, BNC
T connector, and a BNC to Banana plug adapter. Do not connect a terminator
at this time. The Antenna Power light should be blinking green.
3. Make note of the voltmeter reading, for later use.
4. Set the antenna voltage to 3.3 V.
5. Check the voltmeter reading. It should be between 3.1 V and 4.0 V.
6. Set the antenna voltage to 5 V.
7. Check the voltmeter reading. It should be between 5 V and 6 V.
8. Connect a 75 Ω precision terminator to the BNC T connector, to simulate a
typical load. The Antenna Power light should change from blinking green to
solid green.
9. Check the voltmeter reading. It should be between 4 V and 5 V.
10. If the GPS7 module does not provide the correct voltages, replace the
GPS7 module.
11. Disconnect the cable from the GPS7 Antenna connector.
12. Reset the GPS7 module to the voltage noted in step 3, or to the correct voltage
for the antenna in use.
13. Reconnect the antenna.

Swap modules and If you have other TG8000 modules or mainframes available, they can be used to
mainframes help isolate problems.
Swap the GPS7 module into slot 1 of another TG8000 mainframe. If
the GPS7 module works in that mainframe the problem is in the original
mainframe.
Swap a second GPS7 module into slot 1 of the test mainframe. If this module
works in the test mainframe the problem is the original GPS7 module.
Put a module of a different type into slot 1 of the test mainframe. An
AGL7 module is a good one to use, as it uses most of the same signals as a
GPS7 module. If that module works in the test mainframe then suspect the
original GPS7 module, but the problem could still be in the mainframe.

10–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module troubleshooting

Internal mode oven test Perform this procedure to determine if the oven oscillator is working and within
specifications.
1. Set the GPS7 module under test to internal reference mode.
a. Press the Module button to select GPS7 [1].
b. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select REFERENCE,
and then press the ENTER button.
c. If necessary, press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select
SOURCE.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select Internal, and then
press the ENTER button.
2. Use the frequency accuracy setup from the TG8000 Specifications and
Performance Verification Technical Reference manual (available on the Web
at www.tektronix.com/downloads) to compare the Black Burst signals from
the instrument under test to the reference unit. An alternate way to check
frequency accuracy follows step 4.
3. Since the instrument under test is in internal mode the timing may shift. The
vector will probably spin relative to the reference unit, which is locked to GPS.
4. Use the timing display to measure how fast the timing is shifting. A 1 μs shift
per second equates to a 1 ppm difference in the time bases of the two units.
Measure the timing shift for a reasonable time and then calculate the frequency
error. For example, a 25 μs shift in 10 seconds = 25/10 = a 2.5 ppm error.
Go to step 7.
Alternate procedure:
As an alternative to using a reference TG8000/GPS7 unit, you can use a
frequency counter to determine the frequency error.
5. Connect the frequency counter to the BLACK 3 output.
6. Configure the BLACK 3 output to produce a 10 MHz CW signal.
a. Press the MODULE button to select GPS7.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select SELECT OUTPUT.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select BLACK 3. Press
the ENTER button to confirm this selection.
d. If necessary, press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to choose
SELECT FORMAT.
e. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to choose CW 10 MHz. Press
the ENTER button to confirm this selection.
f. Measure the frequency accuracy directly. At 10 MHz, 1 ppm = 10 Hz, so
a measured frequency of 10,000,010 Hz is 1 ppm high.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–19


GPS7 module troubleshooting

7. If the difference is >0.1 ppm then the mainframe may need calibration, or the
oven may not be able to tune to the correct frequency.
8. If the GPS7 module will lock to GPS, then perform an oven calibration. (See
page 2-5, To adjust the master clock using an installed GPS7 module.) If that
fixes the problem then the system is functioning correctly.
9. If the GPS7 module will not lock but you have an AGL7 module, you
can perform an oven calibration using that module. If that works then the
mainframe oven is functioning correctly.
10. If the internal frequency is >3 ppm off, or steps 8 or 9 are not able to calibrate
it to the correct frequency, then replace the mainframe.

ADC bus diagnostics Perform this procedure to determine if all the bits on the ADC are properly
connected to the FPGA logic.

NOTE. ADC bus diagnostics is only available on GPS7 modules with the REF IN
connector on the rear panel.

1. Ensure nothing is connected to the BLACK 1 / REF IN connector.


2. Go to the REFERENCE menu of the GPS7 under test.
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. You should see SOURCE in the menu. If you do not, press the down (▼)
arrow button until it appears.
5. Press the right (►) arrow button until Internal appears, and then press the
ENTER button.
6. Press the BACK button to exit the menu.
7. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT OUTPUT appears.
8. You should see BLACK 1 in the menu. If you do not, press the left (◄) arrow
button until it appears, and then press the ENTER button.
9. You should see INPUT-OUTPUT in the menu. If you do not, press the down
(▼) arrow button until it appears.
10. You should see OUTPUT (if allowed) in the menu. If you do, press the
ENTER button. If you do not, press the right (►) arrow button until it appears
in the menu, and then press the ENTER button.
11. Press the down (▼) arrow button until SELECT FORMAT appears in the
menu, and then press the ENTER button.

10–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module troubleshooting

12. You should see NTSC in the menu. If you do, press the ENTER button. If
you do not, press the right (►) arrow button until it appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
13. Press the right (►) arrow button until Black Burst with Field REF appears,
and then press the ENTER button.
14. Press the BACK button twice to exit the menu.
15. Press the up (▲) arrow button until DIAGNOSTICS appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
16. Press the right arrow button until ADC BUS appears.
17. Check for the following conditions:
If any bits in the Stuck field show an H or an L, then the bit is not moving.
Replace the GPS7 module.
If any bits in the Short field show an S, then there is a short between some
of the bits. Replace the GPS7 module.

Loop output reference test Perform this procedure to view the reference input data looped out to the BLACK
2 connector. This can help determine correct functionality of the input circuitry or
problems in the input signal.

NOTE. The loop output reference test is only available on GPS7 modules with the
REF IN connector on the rear panel.

1. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:


a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
2. Connect Black 1 of the reference unit to the Black 1 of the GPS7 module.
3. Connect the Black 2 of the GPS7 module to the composite input of the
WRM7120 waveform monitor. Terminate the loop output on the WFM7120.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–21


GPS7 module troubleshooting

4. Configure the Reference Source of the GPS7 module to be NTSC Burst.


a. Press the MODULE button until GPS7 appears.
b. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select REFERENCE.
c. Press the ENTER button.
d. Press the right (►) arrow button until NTSC Burst appears, and then
press the ENTER button.
e. Press the BACK button.
5. Configure Black 2 of the GPS7 module to Enable Loop Output from Black 1.
a. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SELECT OUTPUT.
b. Press the right (►) arrow button until BLACK 2 appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
c. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select LOOP FROM
BLACK1.
d. Press the right (►) arrow button until Enable appears, and then press
the ENTER button.
e. Press the BACK button.
6. Use the WFM7120 to examine the video. Check that the signal level is
appropriate. The normal level is approximately twice the normal video
size. Check for clipping or distortion of the signal. If the signal level is not
appropriate or there is clipping or distortion, replace the GPS7 module.

10–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module removal and replacement

GPS7 module removal and replacement


This section contains instructions on how to remove and replace the customer
parts of the GPS7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
Table 10-6: Required tools for GPS7 module removal and replacement
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts1/4 inch screwdriver bits Standard tool
T10 TORX tip TORX driver bit for T10 size screw heads Standard tool
Flat or Phillips tip Small tip for removing the module from the Standard tool
mainframe
9/16 inch wrench Wrench or deep nut driver, to remove nuts Standard tool
from BNC connectors
3/16 inch socket Socket or nut driver to remove jackscrews Standard tool
from DSUB connector

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–23


GPS7 module removal and replacement

To remove the GPS7 module


Use the Module installation and removal section to remove the GPS7 module
from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

To replace the Antenna Power indicator (light pipe)


CAUTION. Do not remove the light pipe board connector from the board unless
you have a replacement board connector available. Removing the light pipe board
connector damages it, so it can not be reused.

1. Pull the light pipe out of its board connector. This is a slip-fit and should
come apart easily.
2. Remove the external rear panel:
a. Use the 9/16 inch wrench to remove the nuts from the four BNC connectors
on the rear panel.
b. Move the external rear panel away from the chassis, pulling the light
pipe out with it.
3. Pull the light pipe out of the light pipe lens in the external rear panel. This is a
slip-fit and should come apart easily.
4. Gently remove the light pipe lens from the external rear panel.
5. When reassembling, follow this sequence:
a. Insert the light pipe into the light pipe lens.
b. Thread the light pipe through the external rear panel until the lens is
against the rear panel.
c. Gently push the light pipe lens into place in the rear panel.
d. Replace the external rear panel.
e. Plug the light pipe into the light pipe board connector.

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

NOTE. The Black 1, Black 2, and Black 3 BNC connectors are not customer
To replace the rear-panel replaceable.
connectors

10–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module removal and replacement

Antenna connector. To remove the Antenna connector:


1. Use the 9/16 inch socket to remove the nut on the Antenna BNC connector.
When reinstalling, tighten the nut to 14 in/lb.
2. Unplug the RF coaxial cable from P1 on the Trimble GPS Receiver board.
3. Remove the Antenna connector, threading the cable through the rear panel.

LTC/GPI connector. To remove the LTC/GPI connector:


1. Use the 3/16 inch hex driver to remove the jackscrews securing the LTC/GPI
connector to the rear panel. When reinstalling, use the hex driver to tighten
the jackscrews hand tight.
2. Unplug the LTC/GPI cable from J10 on the GPS7 Main board and remove it
from the cable clamp.
When reinstalling, twist the cable twice before plugging it in to J10 on the
Main board.
3. Remove the LTC/GP DSUB connector and cable.

To replace the chassis 1. Pull the light pipe out of its board connector. This is a slip-fit and should
come apart easily.
2. Remove the external rear panel:
a. Use the 9/16 inch wrench to remove the nuts from the four BNC connectors
on the rear panel.
b. Move the external rear panel away from the chassis, pulling the light
pipe out with it.
3. Unplug the RF coaxial cable from P1 on the Trimble GPS Receiver board,
and remove the Antenna connector and cable.
4. Use the 3/16 inch hex driver to remove the jackscrews securing the LTC/GPI
connector to the rear panel. When reinstalling, use the hex driver to tighten
the jackscrews hand tight.
5. Remove the LTC/GPI connector from the rear panel.
6. Remove the four T10 screws that attach the circuit board to the chassis. When
reassembling, torque these screws to 8 in/lb.
7. Lift the Main board assembly off of the chassis and set it on a static-free
work surface.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–25


GPS7 module replaceable parts list

GPS7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the GPS7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the Mainframe
replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the GPS7 module.

Table 10-7: GPS7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
10-5-1 352-1117-00 1 LIGHT PIPE SET: 1 BD CONN, 1 LIGHT PIPE, 1 LENS
-2 174-5509-00 1 CABLE, FEMALE SMB TO FEMALE BNC, 8.0 IN.
-3 214-3903-00 2 VENDOR: LYNTRON; SCREW, JACK; 4-40 X 0.312 LONG, 0.188 H HEX HEAD
STAND OFF, 4-40 INT THD, X 0.312 THD EXT 4-40, STEEL, SN PLATED
-4 214-4762-00 2 SPRING; CONICAL
-5 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-6 210-1039-00 3 WASHER, LOCK; 0.521 ID, INT, 0.025 THK, STEEL, ZINC FINISH
-7 220-0497-00 3 NUT, PLAIN, HEX; .5-28 X .562 HEX, BRS, NI (NICKEL) PLATED
-8 333–4575-00 B010100 B019999 1 PANEL, REAR; WITHOUT TIMECODE AND GENLOCK; SAFETY CONTROLLED
333–4575-01 B020000 1 PANEL, REAR; WITH TIMECODE AND GENLOCK; SAFETY CONTROLLED
C020000
-9 441-2544-00 1 CHASSIS, MODULE
-10 211-0408-00 8 SCR, ASSY, WSHR; 4-40 X 0.250, PNH, STEEL, ZINC FINISH, T-10 TORX DR,
SEMS
-11 116-1144-00 B010100 B019999 1 MODULE ASSEMBLY; GPS7 WITHOUT TIMECODE AND GENLOCK
116-1157-05 B020000 1 MODULE ASSEMBLY; GPS7 WITH TIMECODE AND GENLOCK
C020000
-12 174-5521-00 1 CABLE, 2X4, 2MM PITCH, FEMALE TO FEMALE SQUARE PINS
-13 119–7518–00 1 MODULE, GPS; TIMING, 1PPS +/-15NS; 3.3V, 0.35W, 1575.42 MHZ L1; 2.6 X
1.3 X 0.33, TRIMBLE RESOLUTION T
-14 174-5511-00 1 CABLE, DSUB TO BOARD 15 CONDUCTOR
-15 343-1584-00 1 CLAMP; WIRE ROUTING, 0.51 H X 0.625 W, NYLON

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

10–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


GPS7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 10-5: GPS7 module replaceable parts

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 10–27


GPS7 module replaceable parts list

10–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator
module
HD3G7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator module. Refer
to Mainframe service overview for information about servicing the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the HD3G7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the HD3G7 module, review the following information:
HD3G7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

HD3G7 module service The service information for the HD3G7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
HD3G7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 11-2.)

HD3G7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the


module or block level. (See page 11-9.)
HD3G7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 11-12.)
HD3G7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 11-22.)
HD3G7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the HD3G7 module by part number. (See page 11-25.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–1


HD3G7 module adjustment procedures

HD3G7 module adjustment procedures


The HD3G7 HD 3 Gb/s SDI Video Generator has one adjustments associated
with it.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The HD3G7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +18 °C to +28 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to perform the adjustments
needed for this module.

Table 11-1: Equipment required for HD3G7 module adjustment procedures


Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital signal analyzer 1 Digital signal analyzer with a 20 GHz Tektronix DSA8200 with an 80E04
electrical sampling module and a probe electrical sampling module and an
interface module 80A03 Tek Connect Probe Interface
module
Stable 10 kHz sine wave 1 CW sine wave with 800 mVp-p ±5% Tektronix AFG3101
generator into 75 Ω, THD < 60 dBc, 10 kHz, and
<50 mV DC offset
Tekconnect 75 Ω to 50 Ω 1 Tektronix TCA75
adapter with BNC input
connector
Precision RMS voltmeter 1 Keithley 2700 DMM
6 dB SMA attenuator 1 Tektronix part number 015-1001-01
SMA (male) to BNC (female) Tektronix part number 015-0554-00
adapter
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 1 Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
high-bandwidth cable
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 50 Ω 1 Tektronix part number 012-0057-01
cable

11–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module adjustment procedures

Table 11-1: Equipment required for HD3G7 module adjustment procedures (cont.)
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
75 Ω precision terminator 1 75 Ω ±0.1% Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

Adjustment procedures
There is only one adjustment for the HD3G7 module. Perform this adjustment if
the module fails the SDI Output Amplitude portion of the Performance Verification
procedure. This procedure replicates part of the Performance Verification.
Before adjusting the SDI Output Amplitude, you must first characterize the test
system amplitude.

To characterize the test There are two parts to the amplitude characterization:
system amplitude Part A: Set up a characterization reference to the DMM.
Part B: Characterize the test system.

Part A: Characterize the Reference to the DMM.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. Connect one end of the 1 m high-bandwidth cable to the AFG3101 output
and connect the other end of the cable to the BNC-T.
b. Connect the 75 Ω precision terminator to the other end of the BNC-T and
connect the banana-plug adapter to the side of the BNC T.
c. Connect the banana plug adapter to the input of the DMM.
2. Set the AFG3101 for an 800 mVp-p 10 kHz sine wave into a 75 Ω load.
3. Check that the AFG3101 output is On.
4. Set the DMM to measure ACRMS Volts with a medium filter, and set the range
to display four digits.
5. Record the DMM AC Voltage reading in the SDI Output Amplitude table.
(See Table 11-2.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–3


HD3G7 module adjustment procedures

Print this table for use during the HD3G7 module adjustment procedure.

Table 11-2: HD3G7 module SDI output amplitude


Minimum Value Maximum
Characterization
DMM Measurement —— ——
(typically 0.2880 V)
Oscilloscope Cycle RMS —— ——
(typically 116 mV)
Oscilloscope Cycle Mean —— ——
(typically 1 mV)
Sine wave RMS amplitude ——
(typically 116 mV)
Attenuation Factor 2.35 2.55
Adjustment Record Value
Minimum Before adjustment After adjustment Maximum
Signal 1 amplitude
Measured value (μ) 776 mV 824 mV
with attenuation
Signal 2 amplitude
Measured value (μ) 776 mV 824 mV
with attenuation

11–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module adjustment procedures

Set up the digital signal analyzer.

CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge can damage the oscilloscope modules. To


prevent damage, always work in a static free environment and discharge the
static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while
handling these modules.

1. Install the 80A03 output cable into the oscilloscope Channel 1/2 slot.
2. Install the 80E04 sampling head into the 80A03 adapter and connect the two
using the semirigid SMA cables that come with the 80A03 adapter.
3. Install the TCA-75 into the left port of the 80A03.
4. Install the TCA-BNC into the right port of the 80A03.
5. If necessary, press the Default Settings button on the oscilloscope.
6. Press the Channel 1 button on the 80E04 sampling head to activate Channel 1.

Part B: Characterize the test system.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. Connect the 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the AFG3101 output to the
TCA75 in the left port of the 80A03.
b. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the AFG3101 trigger output and connect the
other end to the BNC to SMA adapter.
c. Connect the BNC-to-SMA adapter to the 6 dB SMA attenuator, and
connect the attenuator to the trigger input on the oscilloscope.
2. Keep the AFG3101 settings the same as in Part A of this test.
3. Set the oscilloscope:
Time/Div: 20 μs
Volts/Div: 50 mV
Averaging: 16
Record Length: 4000 points
4. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 1, then select pulse amplitude, and
then select it to measure Cycle RMS. Record the value in the SDI Output
Amplitude table. (See Table 11-2.)
5. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 2, then select pulse amplitude, and
then select it to measure Cycle Mean. Record the value in the SDI Output
Amplitude table. (See Table 11-2.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–5


HD3G7 module adjustment procedures

6. Calculate the corrected RMS sine wave amplitude:

7. Record the result in the SDI Output Amplitude table. (See Table 11-2.)
8. Calculate the total system attenuation factor: .
9. Record this total system attenuation factor in the SDI Output Amplitude table.
(See Table 11-2.)
10. Enter the attenuation factor value into the oscilloscope:
a. On the oscilloscope, press the SETUP DIALOG button.
b. Select the “Vert” tab from the top of the setup page.
c. Select the “External Attenuation” box, and then enter the attenuation
factor calculated in step 8 above.

To adjust the SDI output Use this procedure to adjust the SDI output amplitude:
amplitude 1. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
2. Connect the 50 Ω cable from the HD3G7 TRIGGER OUTPUT connector,
using the BNC to SMA adapter (with or without the 6 dB attenuator) to the
oscilloscope Trigger Direct input.
3. Connect the 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the HD3G7 Signal 1 output to
the TCA75 adapter in the left port of the 80A03.
4. Press the TG8000 MODULE button until HD3G7:STATUS appears in the
display.
5. If necessary, press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to choose
CALIBRATION.
6. If necessary, use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select Output 1 to
adjust the Signal 1 output, and then press the ENTER button.
7. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.

11–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module adjustment procedures

8. If necessary, set the oscilloscope:


Time/Div: 2 ns
Volts/Div: 50 mV
Averaging: 16
Record Length: 4000 points
9. On the oscilloscope, select Measurement 3, Pulse-Amplitude, and then
Amplitude to measure the amplitude on the flat part of the long pulse.
10. Right click on the measurement readout, and select Show Statistics and Show
Annotations from the pop-up menu.
11. Note the expected average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, displayed
on the oscilloscope.
12. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
13. Record the average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, in the Signal 1
amplitude row, Before adjustment value column of the SDI output amplitude
table.

NOTE. If you entered the attenuation factor into the scope at the end of
the amplitude characterization procedure, then the scope will display the
multiplication result.

14. Press the TG8000 up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button, and then press the
Enter button, to activate the adjustment mode.
15. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
16. Press the TG8000 up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the amplitude
to the expected average value calculated in step 11.
17. Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the average attenuation measured value (μ) is
within 1 mV of the corrected attenuation value, and then press the TG8000
ENTER button to save the new amplitude calibration value and exit the
Channel 1 Adjustment mode.
18. Record the new measured attenuation corrected value in the After adjustment
column of the SDI Output Amplitude table. (See Table 11-2.)
19. Press the BACK button to exit Channel 1 Calibration mode.
20. Move the 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the HD3G7 Signal 1 output to
the Signal 2 output.
21. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select Output 2 to adjust the
Signal 2 output, and then press the ENTER button.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–7


HD3G7 module adjustment procedures

22. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.
23. Repeat steps 13 through 19 for the Signal 2 output.
24. Cycle the power on the TG8000 to return the generator to normal operating
mode.

11–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module theory of operation

HD3G7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the
HD3G7 module. The discussions relate to the Block Diagram. (See Figure 11-1
on page 11-11.)
There is some circuitry on the HD3G7 Main circuit board which is not used.
Unused circuitry is not represented in the block diagram, nor is it discussed in
this theory of operation.

Overview
The HD3G7 module has three circuit boards: the main module board, which
mounts horizontally and contains the bulk of the circuitry, and two small input and
output boards. These input and output boards plug into the main board vertically
and provide the rear BNC connections and the circuits required to buffer the
high-speed I/O signals.
The heart of the HD3G7 generator is an FPGA, with other circuits that provide
support and ancillary functions. There are two basic operational modes: Generator
and Converter.
In generator mode the FPGA creates the output signal such as color bars or a
ramp. The information to create the signals is completely contained within the
FPGA. Serialization and scrambling is also done in the FPGA.
In converter mode an input signal at 1.5 Gb/s HD rate is up-converted to 3 Gb/s.
De-serialization, up-conversion, and reserialization are all handled in the FPGA.

FPGA and associated circuits


A Programmable Logic Device (PLD) configures the FPGA by loading a file from
the Flash at power up. This configures the FPGA for normal operation; there is
a separate file for calibration.
The CPU interface connects to both the PLD and FPGA. During SW upgrade, the
Flash files are loaded from the mainframe via the PLD. The FPGA uses the CPU
connection to access the control registers.

Generator mode In generator mode, the FPGA contains horizontal and vertical counters which
create the raster structure for the selected signal. These counters drive the FPGA
elements that create the actual video signals such as color bars or flat field, along
with the EAV and SAV info and the required CRCs. The video signals are then
scrambled, serialized, and sent at the full 3 Gb/s out of the FPGA to the output
boards.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–9


HD3G7 module theory of operation

Converter mode In converter mode, the FPGA de-serializes and de-scrambles the 1.5 GHz input
signal. Each active line from the input is used twice, to double the data rate for the
output. The lines are multiplexed into the output according to the level A or B
protocol, and then scrambled and serialized.

Clocks and frames


Generator mode In generator mode, the mainframe provides three frame pulse signals. The actual
frame signal used is the appropriate one for the rate of the signal being generated.
The selected input frame resets the counters in the FPGA, establishing the correct
video timing. These frames are not used in converter mode, as the converter
output is always a slightly delayed version of the input signal.
The mainframe also provides a 54 MHz clock for generator mode. This 54 MHz
clock drives a DDS in the FPGA to create a digitized sine wave, which is then
applied to the flexible generator clock circuit. Depending on the output format
the flexible clock output is at either 148.5 MHz or 148.35 MHz. This clock is fed
back to the FPGA to drive the generator core functions, and sent to the FPGA
serializer clock inputs and the trigger output multiplexer.
The 54 MHz input clock also registers the input frame pulse. After it is registered
at 54 MHz it needs to cross to the 148.5 MHz domain. For this to work
deterministically the phase of the two clocks is automatically controlled. The
status of this automatic control system is shown in the module diagnostic menu as
DDS1 phase.

Converter mode In converter mode, the fixed 148.5 MHz Ref clock is used as a training clock in
the input de-serializer. The FPGA then outputs a clock that was recovered from
the input. This clock is passed through the jitter attenuator, to remove possible
jitter from the HD input, and then, like the generator mode clock, it drives the
serializer clocks and the trigger output multiplexer.

Input and output boards


The input board contains a cable equalizer to accommodate various cable lengths.
The equalizer output is sent to the FPGA. The input board also contains the trigger
output. The user can select the active pixel clock, or if in generator mode, a pulse
at either line or field rate. The output is 50 Ω, to drive typical oscilloscope inputs.
The output board takes two channels from the FPGA serializers and buffers
them to drive 75 Ω cable. The output level is set by non-volatile electronic
potentiometers on the output board, so the calibration is captured in the board.

11–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module theory of operation

Figure 11-1: Simplified block diagram of the HD3G7 module

Power supplies
There are three switching supplies, and several linear supplies in the module.
Most of the power for the module comes in as 5 V and is converted to the voltage
needed by the switching supplies. The mainframe supplies a small amount of
3.3 V for the processor interface, but the bulk of the 3.3 V used on the board
is produced by the switching supply.
There are also 1.8 V and 1.2 V supplies, which are used for the memory and
FPGA cores.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–11


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

HD3G7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures to troubleshoot the HD3G7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the Mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual.(See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed below is required to troubleshoot the HD3G7 module.

Table 11-3: Equipment required to troubleshoot the HD3G7 module


Equipment Requirement Suggested equipment
TG8000 mainframe For the HD3G7 module under test Tektronix TG8000
HD-SDI video signal generator 1080 59.94i 100% Color Bars signal Tektronix TG8000 with HDVG7 generator
module
HD Waveform monitor Must be able to display 3 Gb/s SDI signal Tektronix WFM7120
and jitter
Oscilloscope >500 MHz bandwidth, 50 Ω input Tektronix DPO4104
Digital Multimeter Used to check power supply voltages and Fluke 87 or equivalent
fuses
75 Ω BNC cables (2) Length: 42 inches, used to connect the Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
instruments
50 Ω BNC cable (1) Length: 43 inches, used to test trigger Tektronix part number 012–0057–01
output
ROHS compliant ESD safe soldering The HD3G7 boards do not contain any
workstation user-serviceable parts, but any soldering
must be ROHS compliant
Other TG8000 modules Used to test mainframe operation BG7, AVG7, or DVG7

11–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

Problem identification
If there is a problem, first perform the HD3G7 Performance Verification procedure,
found in the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification Technical
Reference manual, available on the Web at www.tektronix.com/downloads. Any
problems found with that procedure can be a starting point for troubleshooting.
General problems and actions to follow are shown in the following table.

Table 11-4: HD3G7 module troubleshooting


Problem Actions
• Fails Power On Self Test (POST) • Run power on test procedure.
• HD3G7 does not appear in menu • Run power on in Factory mode test procedure.
• Check for current software.
• Run power supply test.
• Perform swap modules procedure.
• No output from Signal BNCs • Run power on test procedure.
• Check diagnostics reported values.
• Run power supply test.
• Verify configuration.
• Perform swap modules procedure.
• No signal at Trigger Output BNC • Check diagnostics reported values.
• Run Test Multiple Frame Rate procedure.
• Verify configuration.
• Check diagnostics reported values.
• CRC Errors in converter mode • Run converter mode test procedure.
• Run Check diagnostics procedure.
• Generator video color errors • Verify configuration.
• Perform swap modules procedure.
Generator Mode: • Check diagnostics reported values.
• Unstable video • Run Test Multiple Frame Rate procedure.
• Excessive jitter
Converter Mode: • Check diagnostics reported values.
• Unstable video • Run converter mode test procedure.
• Excessive jitter
• Generator output lost when • Run Test Multiple Frame Rate procedure.
format is changed
• If no other problem found, replace the HD3G7 module.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–13


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

HD3G7 module troubleshooting procedures


Power on self test When you first apply power to a TG8000, it runs a Power On Self Test (POST).
If an error is encountered during this POST the display will show one of several
error codes. (See Table 11-5.) Watch the display during boot up and note any error
codes. Error codes may appear for as short a time as three seconds.

Table 11-5: POST error codes


Error
code Meaning Action
1: No input board in slot 0 - The input module is not detected Replace the Input module.
by the processor.
2: No output board in slot 2 - The output module is not detected Replace the Output module.
by the processor.
3: PLD keyword != 0xAAAA - The processor did not read the These errors indicate a failure of basic
correct code interfacing to the module. communications between the mainframe processor
4: PLD keyword != 0x5555 - The processor did not read the and the PLD on the module. If possible, try the
correct code interfacing to the module. module in another slot or mainframe. If that is
not possible, or if that fails, then replace the
HD3G7 module.
5: FPGA not configured Check the SW version. If necessary, reload the
Module flash that holds the FPGA configuration
file. If the SW is current and correctly installed
and this error is still encountered, then replace the
HD3G7 module.
6: FPGA R/W check 0x55 failed (0x20040A) These errors indicate the main processor
7: FPGA R/W check 0x55 failed (0x20040C) cannot communicate with the FPGA on the
8: FPGA R/W check 0xAA failed (0x20040A) HD3G7 module. If possible, try the module in
9: FPGA R/W check 0xAA failed (0x20040C) another slot or mainframe. If that is not possible, or
if that fails, then replace the HD3G7 module.

11–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

Check the module There are several internally detected physical measurements which are reported
diagnostics by the HD3G7 module diagnostics. Use this procedure to access the module
diagnostics:
1. Press the Module button to select HD3G7 [x].
2. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to choose Diagnostics, and then
press the Enter button to enter the diagnostics submenu.
3. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to scroll through these diagnostic
tests:
PLL Status: Jit:Locked should be displayed in converter mode and
Flex1:Lock should be displayed in generator mode. If the appropriate
Locked message is not displayed when expected, it can indicate a problem
with the module, or with the input clock from the mainframe, or with the
input signal. Flex 0 is not used currently and may indicate lock or unlock.
DDS Status: DDS1 Phase:Lock should be displayed when in generator
mode. Lock or Unlk may be displayed when in converter mode. DDS0 is
not used currently and may indicate lock or unlock.
CRC Errors: Displays a count of errors detected on the converter input.
Errors will occur at power up and should be cleared after an input is
connected in converter mode.
Clear CRC Errors: Press enter to clear the input CRC error counters.
Temperatures: The HD3G7 module detects the temperature on the board.
This temperature is normally about 15 °C above ambient temperature.
If the temperature is very high or low, check that the fan is operating,
the installation clearances are correct, and that all cables are connected
properly. If there is still a problem, replace the HD3G7 module.
FPGA Version: Current: shows the FPGA version that is loaded.
Expected: shows the version that the operating firmware expects. If these
are different, consider upgrading the software.
VOLTAGE MON (1, 2, 3, & 4): All internal voltages except the
mainframe +5 V supply are measured and displayed with “OK” if they
are within the established limits. If any voltages are out of the established
limits, the HD3G7 module must be replaced.
DDS SWEEP: This diagnostic capability is available only in factory
mode and is not used in normal module troubleshooting.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–15


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

Check the installed Use this procedure to check the installed software versions:
firmware version 1. Access the UTILITY menu.
a. From the TG8000 main menu, press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
buttons to select UTILITY.
b. Press the ENTER button to enter the utility submenu.
2. Access the Software Version information.
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select VERSION INFO
(F/W).
b. Read the firmware version.
3. If the CPU is not Version 1.1 or later, then install current software. The latest
software is available on the Web at www.tektronix.com/software.

Verify the configuration The HD3G7 module can be configured to operate in either generator mode or
converter mode, depending on your operational requirements. To eliminate the
configuration as the source of a problem, set the module to the factory default:
1. If necessary, save the user configuration in a preset. (The user configuration
may already be saved as the power on preset.)
2. Restore the factory default:
a. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears.
b. Press Enter to select Preset.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
e. Press the ENTER button to reset the instrument to the factory default
settings.
f. Press the BACK button to return the TG8000 main menu.

11–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

3. Check to see if the problem still exists.


If the problem has been fixed, compare the settings between the factory default
and the user configuration to find the issue. (See Table 11-6.)

Table 11-6: HD3G7 module factory default settings


Men item name Settings
STATUS 1080 59.94p SMPTE Color Bars
3 Gb/s Level A YCbCr 4:2:2 10b
OUTPUT MODE Level A
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 μs
VIDEO
Y ON
Cb ON
Cr ON
TRIGGER OUTPUT System Clock

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–17


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

Check the power supplies The module diagnostics check most of the power supplies, but there are two that
need manual verification.
1. Remove the TG8000 top cover. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
2. Check the +5 V supply by measuring the voltage at F121, which should be in
the range of +4.75 V to +5.25 V. (See Figure 11-2.) This fuse is located under
one of the mainframe support bars, and is difficult to access.
3. Check the +3.3 V supply by measuring the voltage at F122, which should be
in the range of +3.135 V to +3.465 V. (See Figure 11-2.) This fuse is located
under one of the mainframe support bars, and is difficult to access.
Make sure that the voltage is present on both ends of the fuse. If the voltage is
present on only one end of the fuse the module must be replaced. If the voltage
is not present on either end of the fuse, check the mainframe power and the
connector between the module and the mainframe. If they are okay, the mainframe
must be repaired.

Figure 11-2: HD3G7 module power supply test points

11–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

Check the multiple frame The mainframe provides three frame pulses which are used to set the module
rates timing relative to the rest of the instrument. Different frame pulses are used,
depending on the signal format the instrument is set for. Use this procedure to
investigate problems in that circuitry.
1. Connect the HD3G7 module outputs to a waveform monitor.
2. Apply power to the TG8000 mainframe.
3. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears.
b. Press Enter button to select Preset.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
e. Press the ENTER button to reset the instrument to the factory default
settings.
f. Press the BACK button to return the TG8000 main menu.
4. Verify that both HD3G7 module outputs provide a 59.94, 1080p format, 75%
color bar signal.
5. Check the DDS1:Phase lock status, as described in the Module Diagnostics.
(See page 11-15, Check the module diagnostics.).
6. Change the HD3G7 format to 60 Hz:
a. Press the MODULE button to select the HD3G7 module.
b. Press the FORMAT button to enter the HD3G7 format menu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 60p.
7. Check the DDS1:Phase lock status, as described in the Module Diagnostics.
(See page 11-15, Check the module diagnostics.).
8. Change the HD3G7 format to 50 Hz:
a. Press the MODULE button to select the HD3G7 module.
b. Press the FORMAT button to enter the HD3G7 format menu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 50p.
9. Check the DDS1:Phase lock status, as described in the Module Diagnostics.
(See page 11-15, Check the module diagnostics.).
If one of the formats (59.94 Hz, 50 Hz, or 60 Hz) works correctly, but the other
one does not, the mainframe sync pulse may be missing. Perform the Swap
modules procedure, below, to determine the source of the problem.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–19


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

Swap modules The interface between the mainframe and the module may make it difficult to
determine whether the problem lies in the mainframe or in the module. Trying
the HD3G7 module in another slot or in a known good mainframe is a simple
way to quickly isolate which is at fault.
1. Try the HD3G7 module in a known good mainframe, or in another slot where
a DVG7, BG7, or AVG7 module is known to work correctly. These modules
use the same clocks and frame pulses. If the HD3G7 module works correctly
here, replace or repair the original mainframe.
2. Try another HD3G7 module (or a DVG7, BG7, or AVG7 module, all of
which use the same clocks and frame pulses) in the same mainframe and
slot. If another module works correctly in the original slot, then replace the
HD3G7 module.

11–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module troubleshooting

Converter mode test Follow this procedure if there is a problem when the HD3G7 module is set for
converter mode:
1. Confirm that the input signal is present and that the format is compatible with
the selected output. Specifically the input must be interlace video at the same
frame rate as the progressive output (same frame rate: 50, 59.94, or 60 Hz).
2. Remove and reconnect the input signal a few times to see if that clears the
problem.
3. Verify the input is good:
a. Apply the input signal directly to the WFM7120.
b. Check for general status problems, correct format, EDH errors, and
excessive jitter.
4. If the HD3G7 status screen continues to report "Input Signal Unlocked" check
the input module "NO_INPUT_DETECT" test point, along the top edge of
the input board. If the voltage on the test point is low, an input is detected and
the fault is probably on the main module board.

Figure 11-3: No_Input_Detect test point location on the HD3G7 module

Power up in factory mode Putting the instrument into factory mode allows access to calibration, but it also
allows the module to show in the menus even if it fails the POST routine.
1. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
2. Run the Check module diagnostics routine. (See page 11-15, Check the
module diagnostics.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–21


HD3G7 module removal and replacement

HD3G7 module removal and replacement


This section contains instructions on how to remove and replace the customer
replaceable parts of the HD3G7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
Table 11-7: Required tools for HD3G7 module removal and replacement
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Torque driver Accepts 1/4 inch screwdriver bits. Torque range Standard tool
of 5 to 14 in/lb.
T10 TORX tip TORX driver bit for T10 size screw heads Standard tool
P1 Pozidriv tip Pozidriv driver tip for P1 size screw heads Standard tool
Flat or Phillips tip Small tip for removing the module from the Standard tool
mainframe
9/16 inch wrench Wrench or deep nut driver, to remove nuts Standard tool
from BNC connectors

To remove the HD3G7 module


Refer to the Module installation and removal section to remove the
HD3G7 module from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

To disassemble the HD3G7 module


Disassembly of the HD3G7 module is a straightforward process, and can be easily
accomplished. Refer to the illustration in the HD3G7 module replaceable parts
list if necessary. (See Figure 11-5 on page 11-26.) Make sure to retain all the
screws, fasteners, and fittings for reassembly.

NOTE. The Input and Output circuit boards can only be separated from the Main
board after the entire circuit board assembly has been removed from the chassis.

11–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module removal and replacement

To reassemble the HD3G7 module


Reassembly is more complex than disassembly, and must be done in a specific
order to prevent damage to the HD3G7 module. These procedures will start as if
the instrument has been completely disassembled. You may start at an appropriate
step and proceed to the end.

To install a new heat sink Follow this procedure to install a new heat sink. You will need a new gap pad as
well as the heat sink.
1. Place the heat sink on the work surface as shown, with the bosses up.

2. Peel the protective film off of one side of the gap pad, and adhere the gap
pad to the top of the heat sink.
3. Peel the protective film off of the top side of the gap pad.
4. Position the HD3G7 Main circuit board over the heat sink and gap pad,
aligning the holes in the circuit board (on each side of the FPGA) with the
threaded bosses of the heat sink. Press the circuit board down slightly to
adhere the gap pad to the circuit board.
5. Loosely install two of the T10 TORX screws through the circuit board and
into the heat sink.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the FPGA, do not tighten these screws at this
time.

To replace the circuit board Follow this procedure to reinstall the circuit board assembly into the chassis.
into the chassis 1. Install the SDI Input circuit board (878-0199-xx) into J910 of the Main circuit
board, and install the SDI Output circuit board (878-0200-xx) into J922 of
the Main circuit board.
2. Slide the circuit board assembly onto the chassis, guiding the BNC connectors
through the holes in the rear panel.
3. Loosely install the six T10 TORX screws that attach the Main circuit board to
the chassis.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the circuit boards and to the FPGA, do not
tighten these screws at this time.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–23


HD3G7 module removal and replacement

4. If necessary, position the outer rear panel over the BNC connectors.
5. Install the three P1 Posidriv flathead screws, from the bottom through the
chassis into the heat sink. Torque these screws to 5.0 in/lb.
6. Replace the washers and 9/16 inch nuts onto the BNC connectors. Torque
these nuts to 14.0 in/lb.
7. Tighten the eight T10 screws that attach the Main circuit board to the chassis
and to the heat sink, in the sequence shown below. (See Figure 11-4.) Note
that the two screws that attach the Main board to the heat sink are tightened
last (7 and 8). Torque all these screws to 8.0 in/lb.

Figure 11-4: HD3G7 module main board installation


The HD3G7 module is now ready to install in the mainframe.

11–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module replaceable parts list

HD3G7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the HD3G7 module.
Use this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or
servicing information, see Parts ordering information or Module servicing in the
Mainframe replaceable parts list section of this manual. (See page 2-35.)
This section contains a list of the replaceable parts and modules for the HD3G7
module. Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the HD3G7 module.

Table 11-8: HD3G7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
11-5-1 116-1146-03 1 MODULE ASSEMBLY; HD3G7
-2 211-0408-00 8 SCR, ASSY, WSHR; 4-40 X 0.250, PNH, STEEL, ZINC FINISH, T-10 TORX DR,
SEMS
-3 878-0199-00 1 CIRCUIT BD SUBASSEMBLY; SDI INPUT; 389409500 WIRED
-4 878-0200-00 1 CIRCUIT BD SUBASSEMBLY; SDI OUTPUT; 389409600 WIRED
-5 131-M057-00 4 CONN, RF: PCB, FEMALE, BNC, 75 OHM, EDGE LAUNCH TYPE
-6 348-1944-00 1 GAP PAD 3000S30
-7 214-5166-00 1 HEATSINK, PCB TO CHASSIS
-8 441-2555-00 1 CHASSIS, MODULE
-9 333-4576-00 1 PANEL, REAR; SAFETY CONTROLLED
-10 214-4762-00 2 SPRING; CONICAL
-11 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-12 220-0497-00 4 NUT, PLAIN, HEX; .5-28 X .562 HEX, BRS, NI (NICKEL) PLATED
-13 210-1039-00 4 WASHER, LOCK; 0.521 ID, INT, 0.025 THK, STEEL, ZINC FINISH
-14 211-0101-00 3 SCREW, MACHINE; 4-40 X 0.25, FLH, 100 DEG, ZINC PLATED STEEL, T8
-15 348-A128-00 2.5 SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1MM LX6.4MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
cm

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–25


HD3G7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 11-5: HD3G7 module – replaceable parts

11–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HD3G7 module replaceable parts list

Table 11-9: HD3G7 module main board – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
11-6-1 159-5022-00 3 FUSE; 5.0 A, 125 V; FAST BLOW, 0.1 X 0.1 X 0.24, UL REG, CSA CERT; 451005,
SAFETY CONTROLLED
-2 159-0463-00 2 FUSE; SMD: 2 A, 32 V, FAST ACTING, 0.024 OHM, 0603 SIZE, UL/CSA REG,
SAFETY CONTROLLED, TAPE & REEL, 5000 PCS, PB FREE
-3 131-8270-00 3 CONN, EDGECARD, PCB, STRAIGHT, FEMALE, SOCKET, 2X20, 40 POS, HIGH
SPEED, 0.8 MM PITCH, 0.062 BOARD, SMT, SAMTEC MEC8-120-02-L-D-DV
-A - K

Figure 11-6: HD3G7 module main board – replaceable parts

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 11–27


HD3G7 module replaceable parts list

11–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator
module
HDLG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the HDLG7 HD Dual Link Video Generator module. Refer
to Mainframe service overview for information about servicing the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the HDLG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the HDLG7 module, review the following information:
HDLG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

HDLG7 module service The service information for the HDLG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
HDLG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the
module or block level. (See page 12-2.)

HDLG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the


module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 12-4.)
HDLG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 12-5.)
HDLG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 12-8.)
HDLG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the HDLG7 module by part number. (See page 12-10.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 12–1


HDLG7 module theory of operation

HDLG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the
HDLG7 module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Deserializer This block contains a cable equalizer and deserializer circuit that converts the
HDTV Serial Digital Input signal to a 20-bit parallel video signal with the
recovered parallel clock. The circuitry also detects the presence of input signal
and identifies the format and rate of the incoming signal.

Signal processing The Signal Processing block up-interpolates the Cb and Cr data and then
color-space converts the incoming video signal to RGB. 4:4:4 YCbCr and RGB
signals are available at the output of this block. If XYZ is desired as the output,
the gamma correction is removed from the RGB data and the data is color-space
converted to linear XYZ data. The linear XYZ data is then converted using the
digital cinema gamma correction factor.

Converter formatter This block allows selection of the output sample structure, separating the video
data into the dual link format, reinsertion of EAV/SAV data to the two output
signals, and adding incoming ancillary data and embedded audio to the Link
A output video signal.

Address generator This block consists of sample and line counters that can be frame delayed from a
frame reference pulse using the MPU interface. The counter outputs are used to
control the signal generation.

Signal generator engine The Signal Generator Engine contains circuitry to generate the selected test signal
and the EAV and SAV blanking data using the sample and line counts from the
Address Generator.

Generator formatter The Generator Formatter separates the generated video into two output signals
(Link A and Link B).

12–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDLG7 module theory of operation

Link A serializer The Link A Serializer block transforms the selected 20-bit parallel video signal
(converted or generated) to a serial digital signal and drives a 75 Ω BNC output.
In addition, CRC, line numbers, and payload packet are generated and inserted
within this block.

Link B serializer The Link B Serializer block transforms the selected 20-bit parallel video signal
(converted or generated) to a serial digital signal and drives a 75 Ω BNC output.
In addition, CRC, line numbers, and payload packet are generated and inserted
within this block.

Figure 12-1: Simplified block diagram of the HDLG7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 12–3


HDLG7 module interconnect diagram

HDLG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the HDLG7 module and how it interconnects with
the TG8000 mainframe.
Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections, such as power supply
and oscillator, can be found in the Mainframe diagrams section of this manual.
(See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the HDLG7 module is located in the HDLG7 module theory
of operation section. (See page 12-2.)

Figure 12-2: HDLG7 module connections

12–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDLG7 module troubleshooting

HDLG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the
HDLG7 module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to
replace your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the TG8000 Mainframe Troubleshooting section in this manual.(See page 2-10,
Mainframe troubleshooting.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 12-1: Equipment required for HDLG7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the troubleshooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 12–5


HDLG7 module troubleshooting

HDLG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 12-3: HDLG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

12–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDLG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 12-4: HDLG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 12–7


HDLG7 module removal and replacement

HDLG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the HDLG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 12-2: Required tools for removal and replacement of the HDLG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors of the HDLG7 module
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older HDLG7 modules

12–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDLG7 module removal and replacement

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors, or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connector:
connectors 1. Use the Module installation and removal section to remove the
HDLG7 module from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at J911 (upper LINK A), J912 (lower LINK A), J922
(upper LINK B), J921 (lower LINK B), and J711 (HD SDI IN) on the HDLG7
circuit board.
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the six screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from chassis, and then place it on a static
free surface.
4. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
5. Carefully place the circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the six screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the rear-panel
connectors to the chassis.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 12–9


HDLG7 module replaceable parts list

HDLG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the HDLG7 module.
Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the HDLG7 module.

Table 12-3: HDLG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
12-5- 116-1132-02 1 EXCHANGE MODULE, DUAL LINK HDLG7
-1 441-A269-02 1 CHASSIS ASSY; MAIN, HDLG7, AL, W/GASKET; SAFETY CONTROLLED
-2 333-4528-00 1 PANEL, REAR: HDLG7, SAFETY CONTROLLED
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM, HEAD
HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A156-01 1 GASKET, SHIELD; FINGER TYPE, BE-CU, 8.13MM W X 2.79MM H X 406.4MM L]
-6 174-5277-00 5 CABLE, RF, 75 OHM; 110 MM, BNC TO MCX75
-7 211-A245-01 5 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC, W/NUT & LOCK
WASHER, TG8000 OPT FP, AG7, AGL7, BG7, DVG7, HDVG7
-8 671-6184-00 1 CIRCUIT BD ASSY; DUAL LINK GENERATOR/CONVERTER, TESTED, WIRED
389386000
-9 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUTDRIVER, BOX: 14 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19 MM

12–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDLG7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 12-5: HDLG7 module exploded view

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 12–11


HDLG7 module replaceable parts list

12–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator
module
HDVG7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the HDVG7 HDTV Digital Video Generator module. Refer
to Mainframe service overview for information about servicing the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the DVG7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the HDVG7 module, review the following information:
HDVG7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

HDVG7 module service The service information for the HDVG7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
HDVG7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and
the interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 13-2.)

HDVG7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the


module or block level. (See page 13-10.)
HDVG7 module interconnect diagram contains a diagram showing how the
module interconnects with the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 13-12.)
HDVG7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 13-13.)
HDVG7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the
removal of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules.
(See page 13-16.)
HDVG7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules
of the HDVG7 module by part number. (See page 13-18.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–1


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

HDVG7 module adjustment procedures


The only adjustment in the HDVG7 module is for the output level.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The HDVG7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +20 °C to +30 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Access When adjusting the output level, you need to remove the top cover of the
TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to adjust the output level.

Table 13-1: Equipment required for the HDVG7 module adjustment procedures
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital signal analyzer 1 Digital signal analyzer with a 20 GHz Tektronix DSA8200 with an 80E04
electrical sampling module and a probe electrical sampling module and an
interface module 80A03 Tek Connect Probe Interface
module
Stable 10 kHz sine wave 1 CW sine wave with 800 mVp-p ±5% Tektronix AFG3101
generator into 75 Ω, THD < 60 dBc, 10 kHz, and
<50 mV DC offset
Tekconnect 75 Ω to 50 Ω 1 Tektronix TCA75
adapter with BNC input
connector
Precision RMS voltmeter 1 Keithley 2700 DMM
6 dB SMA attenuator 1 Tektronix part number 015-1001-01
SMA (male) to BNC (female) Tektronix part number 015-0554-00
adapter
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 1 Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
high-bandwidth cable

13–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

Table 13-1: Equipment required for the HDVG7 module adjustment procedures (cont.)
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 50 Ω 1 Tektronix part number 012-0057-01
cable
75 Ω precision terminator 1 75 Ω ±0.1% Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

To adjust the output level


Preparation To perform the output level adjustment, you must first remove the top cover of
the TG8000 mainframe. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
After you have removed the top cover, find the variable resistors on the HDVG7
circuit board. (See Figure 13-1.)

WARNING. To avoid serious injury, do not touch exposed connectors or


components when operating the TG8000 mainframe with the top cover removed.
Dangerous potentials exist at several points within the TG8000 mainframe.

Figure 13-1: HDVG7 module circuit board

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–3


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

NOTE. Before adjusting the HDVG7 output amplitude, you must first characterize
the test system amplitude.

To characterize the test There are two parts to the amplitude characterization:
system amplitude Part A: Sets up a characterization reference to the DMM.
Part B: Characterizes the test system.

Part A: Characterize the Reference against the DMM.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. One end of a 1 m high bandwidth cable to the AFG3101 output.
b. The other end of the 1 m cable to the BNC T.
c. The BNC T to a BNC to banana adapter.
d. The other end of the BNC T to a precision terminator.
e. The end of the banana adapter to the input of the DMM.
2. Set the AFG3101 to output a sine wave into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
3. Set the AFG3101 to a 10 kHz output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
4. Set the AFG3101 to a 800 mVp-p output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
5. Check that the output of the AFG3101 is On.
6. Set the DMM to measure AC voltage using a medium filter setting. Set the
range to allow for four digits of RMS amplitude.
7. Record the DMM measurement in the HDVG7 output amplitude table. (See
Table 13-2 on page 13-7.)

Set up the digital signal analyzer.

CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge can damage the oscilloscope modules. To


prevent damage, always work in a static free environment and discharge the
static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while
handling these modules.

1. Install the 80A03 output cable into the Channel 1/2 slot of the oscilloscope.
2. Install the 80E04 sampling head into the 80A03 adapter and connect the two
using the SMA cables.
3. Install the TCA-75 into the left port of the 80A03.
4. Install the TCA-BNC into the right port of the 80A03.

13–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

5. If needed, press the Default Settings button on the oscilloscope.


6. Press the Channel 1 button on the 80E04 sampling head to activate Channel 1.

Part B: Characterize the test system.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. AFG3101 output to 1 m high bandwidth cable.
b. The other end of the cable to a TCA-75.
c. The TCA-75 to the 80A03 in the oscilloscope and plug-in.
d. A 50 Ω cable from the AFG3101 trigger output.
e. The other end of the 50 Ω cable to the BNC to SMA adapter.
f. The SMA adapter to the 6 dB pad.
g. The 6 dB pad to the trigger direct input on the oscilloscope.
2. Keep the AFG3101 at the same output as in Part A of this test.
3. Set the oscilloscope:
Time/Div: 20 μs
Volts/Div: 50 mV
Averaging: 16
Record Length: 4000 points
4. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 1 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle RMS.
5. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 2 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle Mean.
6. Record the Cycle RMS and Cycle Mean values in the HDVG7 output
amplitude table.
7. Calculate the corrected RMS amplitude of the sine
wave:
8. Record the result in the test record.
9. Calculate the total attenuation factor for the system. This is the DMM
measurement divided by the corrected RMS sine wave amplitude. This
attenuation factor will be used after measuring the signal outputs in the next
test.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–5


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

10. Record the attenuation factor value in the HDVG7 output amplitude table.
11. Enter the attenuation factor value into the oscilloscope:
a. On the oscilloscope, press the SETUP DIALOG button.
b. Select the “Vert” tab from the top of the setup page.
c. Select the “External Attenuation” box, and then enter the attenuation
factor calculated in step 9 above.

13–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

HDVG7 output amplitude adjustment table. Print this table for use during the
adjustment procedure.

Table 13-2: HDVG7 output amplitude


Minimum Value Maximum
Characterization
DMM Measurement —— ——
(typically 0.2880 V)
Oscilloscope Cycle RMS —— ——
(typically 116 mV)
Oscilloscope Cycle Mean —— ——
(typically 1 mV)
Sine wave RMS amplitude ——
(typically 116 mV)
Attenuation Factor 2.35 2.55
Adjustment Record Value
Minimum Before adjustment After adjustment Maximum
Signal 1 amplitude
Measured value (μ) 720 mV 880 mV
with attenuation
Black 1 amplitude
(Option BK only) 720 mV 880 mV
Measured value (μ)
with attenuation

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–7


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the HDVG7 Use this procedure to adjust the HDVG7 output amplitude:
output amplitude 1. Set the HDVG7 module for a 75% Color Bar signal output:
a. On the TG8000, press the MODULE button until the HDVG7 module
main menu is displayed.
b. Press the BARS button until 75% Color Bars is displayed.
c. Press the ENTER button to confirm the selection.
2. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
b. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
c. Press the ENTER button to recall the factory default settings.
d. Press the BACK button to return the TG8000 main menu.
3. Connect a 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the SIGNAL 1 output of the
module to the TCA75 BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
4. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the SIGNAL 2 output on the HDVG7 module
(through the BNC to SMA adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the
trigger direct input on a sampling oscilloscope.
5. If necessary, set the oscilloscope as follows:
Time/Div: 2 ns
Volts/Div: 100 mV
Averaging: 1
Record Length: 4000 points
6. On the scope, select Measurement 3, Pulse-Amplitude, and then Amplitude to
measure the amplitude on the flat part of the long pulse.
7. Right click on the measurement readout, and select Show Statistics and Show
Annotations from the pop-up menu.
8. Note the expected average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, displayed
on the oscilloscope.
9. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
10. Record the average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, in the Signal 1
amplitude row Before adjustment value column of the HDVG7 output
amplitude table.

NOTE. If you entered the attenuation factor into the scope at the end of
the amplitude characterization procedure, then the scope will display the
multiplication result.

13–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module adjustment procedures

11. Locate variable resistor R530 on the HDVG7 circuit board. (See Figure 13-1.)
12. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
13. Adjust R530 so that the signal amplitude is equal to the height noted in step 8.
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 until the average attenuation measured value (μ) is
within 1 mV of the corrected attenuation value.
15. Record the new measured attenuation corrected value in the Signal 1 amplitude
row After adjustment value column of the HDVG7 output amplitude table.
16. Option BK only: Adjust the BLACK 1 output amplitude as follows:
a. On the HDVG7, move the cable from the SIGNAL 1 output to the
BLACK 1 output.
b. On the HDVG7, move the cable from the SIGNAL 2 output to the
BLACK 2 output.
c. Locate variable resistor R630 on the HDVG7 circuit board. (See
Figure 13-1.)
d. Repeat steps 8 through 15 for the BLACK 1 output using R630 to adjust
the amplitude.
This completes the output level adjustment procedures.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–9


HDVG7 module theory of operation

HDVG7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the
HDVG7 module.

Bus interface This block provides the communication between the mainframe and the module
circuit.

Address generator This block consists of a frame delay, an MPU interface, a sequencer, an SDRAM
controller, and a blanking data generator. It interfaces the Frame Memory and
the Line Memory and controls the output sequence of the video data in these
memories.

Frame memory Frame memory contains a series of pointers that control the order the video lines
stored in Line Memory are used to produce serial digital signals.

Line memory Line memory holds the actual sample points which define a serial digital signal.

Overlay controller This block consists of an MPU interface and an overlay controller. It inserts data
from the Overlay Memory into the Line Memory data stream to create circular
patterns, ID text, and logo.

Overlay memory The memory generates timings to multiplex the line memory data and the overlay
data used for a circle, ID text, and logo overlay.

Formatter This block consists of a line number and CRC generator, an audio control packet
generator, a data packet generator, an MPU interface, and an SRAM controller. It
inserts line numbers and embedded audio data in the serial digital signals.

Audio memory The memory contains embedded audio data.

Serializer The serializer converts a 20 bits parallel data to SDI signal.

Black generator This block generates black or gray (40% gray) signal for the BLACK 1 and
(Option BK only) BLACK 2 outputs.

13–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module theory of operation

Figure 13-2: Simplified block diagram of the HDVG7 module

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–11


HDVG7 module interconnect diagram

HDVG7 module interconnect diagram


The following figure shows the HDVG7 module and how it interconnects with
the TG8000 mainframe.
Diagrams showing mainframe component interconnections, such as power supply
and oscillator, can be found in the Mainframe diagrams section of this manual.
(See page 2-9.)
A block diagram of the HDVG7 module is located in the HDVG7 module theory
of operation section. (See page 13-10.)

Figure 13-3: HDVG7 module interconnect diagram

13–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module troubleshooting

HDVG7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures for troubleshooting the HDVG7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the Mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual.(See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed in the following table is required for troubleshooting.

Table 13-3: Equipment required for HDVG7 module troubleshooting


Equipment description Minimum requirements/example
Screwdriver handle Accept Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
TG8000 mainframe A TG8000 mainframe that is functioning
correctly.

To back up the instrument settings


Before you begin the troubleshooting procedures, create a preset to save your
instrument settings as follows:
1. Press the MODULE button until the mainframe main menu (TG8000:
PRESET) appears.
2. Press the ENTER button to access the PRESET submenu.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select SAVE.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select a preset number to save
instrument settings.
5. Press the ENTER button to save the current instrument settings to the new
preset.
After the problem is solved, recall the preset you created.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–13


HDVG7 module troubleshooting

HDVG7 module troubleshooting trees

Figure 13-4: HDVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (1)

13–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module troubleshooting

Figure 13-5: HDVG7 module troubleshooting procedure (2)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–15


HDVG7 module removal and replacement

HDVG7 module removal and replacement


This section contains the instructions on how you can remove and replace the
customer replaceable parts of the HDVG7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
The following tools are required to perform the removal and replacement
procedures:

Table 13-4: Required tools for removal and replacement of the HDVG7 module
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Screwdriver handle Accepts Phillips-driver bits
#1 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #1 size screw heads
#2 Phillips tip Phillips-driver bit for #2 size screw heads
Nut driver, 9/16 inch Nut driver for removing the BNC
deep socket connectors of the HDVG7 module
Nut driver, 14 mm Special nut driver for removing the BNC 003-A041-00
connectors of older HDVG7 modules

13–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module removal and replacement

How to replace the rear-panel connectors and chassis


It is usually not necessary to replace the rear-panel connectors or chassis.
However, if a connector or chassis becomes damaged, you can replace it.

To replace the rear-panel Perform the following procedure to replace the rear-panel connector:
connectors 1. Use the Module installation and removal section to remove the HDVG7
module from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)
2. Disconnect the cables at P500 (SIGNAL 1) and P502 (SIGNAL 2) on the
HDVG7 circuit board. If Option BK is installed, also disconnect the cables at
J800 (BLACK 1) and J802 (BLACK 2).
3. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nut securing the damaged
connector to the chassis. Pull the connector away.
4. Perform steps 2 and 3 in reverse order to replace the connector.

To replace the chassis Perform the following procedure to replace the chassis:
1. Use the 9/16 inch or 14 mm nut driver to remove the nuts from each of the
rear-panel connectors.
2. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to remove the six screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
3. Lift the circuit board up and away from chassis, and then place it on a static
free surface.
4. Set the replacement chassis on a firm, flat, static-free work surface.
5. Carefully place the circuit board in place on the chassis.
6. Use a screwdriver with a #2 Phillips tip to install the six screws securing the
circuit board to the chassis.
7. Apply the rear panel to the chassis, and then install all the rear-panel
connectors to the chassis.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–17


HDVG7 module replaceable parts list

HDVG7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the HDVG7 module.
Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the HDVG7 module.

Table 13-5: HDVG7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
13-6- 116-A007-10 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: HDVG7
116-A008-10 1 EXCHANGE MODULE: HDVG7-BK
13-6-1 441-A275-00 1 CHASSIS, MODULE HDVG7: ASSY
-2 333-A409-00 1 PANEL, REAR: HDVG7, AL
333-A410-00 1 PANEL, REAR: HDVG7 OPTION, AL
-3 214-4762-00 2 SPRING, CONICAL
-4 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45MM, LENGTH 11MM, HEAD DIA 5MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-5 348-A128-00 2.5 SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1MM LX6.4MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
CM
-6 174-B846-00 2 CABLE ASSY, RF: 75 OHM, COAX (RG179), 6 CM L, BNC TO PL71-LP-1.5C
174-B846-00 4 CABLE ASSY, RF: 75 OHM, COAX (RG179), 6 CM L, BNC TO PL71-LP-1.5C
(OPTION BK)
-7 211-A245-01 6 SCREW, MACHINE: M3X6MM L, PNH, STL, NI PL, CROSS REC,
W/KOGATAMARU & LOCK WASHER
-8 334-1378-03 1 MARKER, IDENT: MKD SERIAL NO.
-9 342-A146-00 1 INSULATOR, PLATE: HEAT CONDUCTOR, RUBBER, 20MMX20MMX10MM THK
[TC1000-TCK]
342-A146-00 2 INSULATOR, PLATE: HEAT CONDUCTOR, RUBBER, 20MMX20MMX10MM THK
[TC1000-TCK]

STANDARD ACCESSORIES
075-1045-XX 1 MANUAL, TECH: MODULE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
063-4440-XX 1 DVD, SOFTWARE LIBRARY & DOCUMENTATION

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
003-A041-00 1 NUT DRIVER, BOX: 14 MM HEX, BNC RETAINING NUT, MODIFIED 19 MM

13–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


HDVG7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 13-6: HDVG7 module exploded view

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 13–19


HDVG7 module replaceable parts list

13–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI
Video Generator module
SDI7 module service overview
This section contains the information needed to do periodic and corrective
maintenance on the SDI7 Dual Channel SD/HD/3G SDI Video Generator module.
Refer to Mainframe service overview for information about servicing the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 2-1.)
If the SDI7 module does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective
measures should be taken immediately to prevent additional problems.

NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix representative for information on where to


return your instrument if it requires repair during the warranty period.

Before servicing the Before servicing the SDI7 module, review the following information:
SDI7 module Service preparation describes how to prepare to service the instrument.
(See page 1-4.)
Inspection and cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage and how
to clean the exterior and interior of the instrument. (See page 1-6.)
Module installation and removal describes how to install or remove a
generator, genlock, GPS, or Power Supply module from the TG8000
mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

SDI7 module service The service information for the SDI7 module is divided into the following
information subsections:
SDI7 module adjustment procedures addresses after repair adjustment and the
interval between periodic adjustments. (See page 14-2.)

SDI7 module theory of operation contains a circuit description at the module


or block level. (See page 14-10.)
SDI7 module troubleshooting provides information for isolating and
troubleshooting failed modules. (See page 14-13.)
SDI7 module removal and replacement contains procedures for the removal
of defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules. (See
page 14-27.)
SDI7 module replaceable parts list lists all of the field replaceable modules of
the SDI7 module by part number. (See page 14-30.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–1


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

SDI7 module adjustment procedures


The SDI7 module has one adjustment that can be performed, which sets the SDI
output amplitude.

Requirements for adjustment


Before doing the adjustment, note the following requirements.

Personnel This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.

Warm-up period The SDI7 module requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a +18 °C to +28 °C
environment before it is adjusted. Adjustments done before the operating
temperature has stabilized may cause errors in performance.

Required equipment
The following table lists the equipment required to perform the adjustments
needed for this module.

Table 14-1: Equipment required for the SDI7 module adjustment procedures
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
TV signal generator platform 1 Tektronix TG8000
Digital signal analyzer 1 Digital signal analyzer with a 20 GHz Tektronix DSA8200 with an 80E04
electrical sampling module and a probe electrical sampling module and an
interface module 80A03 Tek Connect Probe Interface
module
Stable 10 kHz sine wave 1 CW sine wave with 800 mVp-p ±5% Tektronix AFG3101
generator into 75 Ω, THD < 60 dBc, 10 kHz, and
<50 mV DC offset
Tekconnect 75 Ω to 50 Ω 1 Tektronix TCA75
adapter with BNC input
connector
Precision RMS voltmeter 1 Keithley 2700 DMM
6 dB SMA attenuator 1 Tektronix part number 015-1001-01
SMA (male) to BNC (female) Tektronix part number 015-0554-00
adapter
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 1 Belden 1694, MarkerTek 1694-B-B-3
high-bandwidth cable
1 m (3 ft.) BNC to BNC 50 Ω 1 Tektronix part number 012-0057-01
cable

14–2 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

Table 14-1: Equipment required for the SDI7 module adjustment procedures (cont.)
Item No. Minimum requirement Recommended equipment
75 Ω precision terminator 1 75 Ω ±0.1% Tektronix part number 011-0102-03
BNC T connector 1 Tektronix part number 103-0030-00
BNC female to dual banana 1 Tektronix part number 103-0090-00
adapter

Adjustment procedures
There is only one adjustment for the SDI7 module. Perform this adjustment if the
module fails the SDI Output Amplitude portion of the performance verification
procedure. This procedure replicates part of that procedure.
Before adjusting the SDI Output Amplitude, you must first characterize the test
system amplitude.

To characterize the test There are two parts to the amplitude characterization:
system amplitude Part A: Sets up a characterization reference to the DMM.
Part B: Characterizes the test system.

Part A: Characterize the Reference against the DMM.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. One end of a 1 m high bandwidth cable to the AFG3101 output.
b. The other end of the 1 m cable to the BNC T.
c. The BNC T to a BNC to banana adapter.
d. The other end of the BNC T to a precision terminator.
e. The end of the banana adapter to the input of the DMM.
2. Set the AFG3101 to output a sine wave into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
3. Set the AFG3101 to a 10 kHz output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
4. Set the AFG3101 to a 800 mVp-p output into a load impedance of 75 Ω.
5. Check that the output of the AFG3101 is On.
6. Set the DMM to measure AC voltage using a medium filter setting. Set the
range to allow for four digits of RMS amplitude.
7. Record the DMM measurement in the SDI output amplitude table. (See
Table 14-2 on page 14-6.)

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–3


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

Set up the digital signal analyzer.

CAUTION. Electrostatic discharge can damage the oscilloscope modules. To


prevent damage, always work in a static free environment and discharge the
static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while
handling these modules.

1. Install the 80A03 output cable into the Channel 1/2 slot of the oscilloscope.
2. Install the 80E04 sampling head into the 80A03 adapter and connect the two
using the SMA cables.
3. Install the TCA-75 into the left port of the 80A03.
4. Install the TCA-BNC into the right port of the 80A03.
5. If needed, press the Default Settings button on the oscilloscope.
6. Press the Channel 1 button on the 80E04 sampling head to activate Channel 1.

Part B: Characterize the test system.


1. Connect the equipment as follows:
a. AFG3101 output to 1 m high bandwidth cable.
b. The other end of the cable to a TCA-75.
c. The TCA-75 to the 80A03 in the oscilloscope and plug-in.
d. A 50 Ω cable from the AFG3101 trigger output.
e. The other end of the 50 Ω cable to the BNC to SMA adapter.
f. The SMA adapter to the 6 dB pad.
g. The 6 dB pad to the trigger direct input on the oscilloscope.
2. Keep the AFG3101 at the same output as in Part A of this test.
3. Set the oscilloscope:
Time/Div: 20 μs
Volts/Div: 50 mV
Averaging: 16
Record Length: 4000 points
4. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 1 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle RMS.
5. On the oscilloscope, select measurement 2 and then pulse amplitude and
select it to measure Cycle Mean.

14–4 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

6. Record the Cycle RMS and Cycle Mean values in the SDI output amplitude
table.
7. Calculate the corrected RMS amplitude of the sine
wave:
8. Record the result in the test record.
9. Calculate the total attenuation factor for the system. This is the DMM
measurement divided by the corrected RMS sine wave amplitude. This
attenuation factor will be used after measuring the signal outputs in the next
test.
10. Record the attenuation factor value in the SDI output amplitude table.
11. Enter the attenuation factor value into the oscilloscope:
a. On the oscilloscope, press the SETUP DIALOG button.
b. Select the “Vert” tab from the top of the setup page.
c. Select the “External Attenuation” box, and then enter the attenuation
factor calculated in step 9 above.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–5


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

SDI output amplitude adjustment table. Print this table for use during the
adjustment procedure.

Table 14-2: SDI7 module SDI output amplitude


Minimum Value Maximum
Characterization
DMM Measurement —— ——
(typically 0.2880 V)
Oscilloscope Cycle RMS —— ——
(typically 116 mV)
Oscilloscope Cycle Mean —— ——
(typically 1 mV)
Sine wave RMS amplitude ——
(typically 116 mV)
Attenuation Factor 2.35 2.55
Adjustment Record Value
Minimum Before adjustment After adjustment Maximum
Signal 1A amplitude
Measured value (μ) 776 mV 824 mV
with attenuation
Signal 1B amplitude
Measured value (μ) 776 mV 824 mV
with attenuation
Signal 2A amplitude
Measured value (μ) 776 mV 824 mV
with attenuation
Signal 2B amplitude
Measured value (μ) 776 mV 824 mV
with attenuation

14–6 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

To adjust the SDI output Use this procedure to adjust the SDI output amplitude:
amplitude 1. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
2. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS appears.
3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select TRIGGER OUTPUT,
and then press the ENTER button.
4. Press the right (►) arrow button to select System Clock, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
5. Press the down (▼) arrow button to display Source: CH[x].
6. Press the right (►) arrow button to select Source: CH1, and then press the
ENTER button to confirm the selection.
7. Press the BACK button to exit the TRIGGER OUTPUT submenu.
8. Connect a 50 Ω cable from the TRIGGER OUTPUT on the SDI7 module
(through the BNC to SMA adapter (with or without the 6 dB pad) to the
trigger direct input on a sampling oscilloscope.
9. Connect a 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the SIGNAL 1A output of the
module to the TCA75 BNC on the oscilloscope adapter.
10. Press the MODULE button until SDI7[x-1]: STATUS appears.
11. Use the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select CALIBRATION, and
then press the ENTER button.
12. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.
13. If necessary, set the oscilloscope:
Time/Div: 2 ns
Volts/Div: 100 mV
Averaging: 16
Record Length: 4000 points
14. On the scope, select Measurement 3, Pulse-Amplitude, and then Amplitude to
measure the amplitude on the flat part of the long pulse.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–7


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

15. Right click on the measurement readout, and select Show Statistics and Show
Annotations from the pop-up menu.
16. Note the expected average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, displayed
on the oscilloscope.
17. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
18. Record the average value, which is indicated by the letter μ, in the Signal 1A
amplitude row Before adjustment value column of the SDI output amplitude
table.

NOTE. If you entered the attenuation factor into the scope at the end of
the amplitude characterization procedure, then the scope will display the
multiplication result.

19. Press the TG8000 up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button, and then press the
Enter button, to activate the adjustment mode.
20. Press the Clear Data button on the oscilloscope and wait about 5 seconds
before proceeding to the next step.
21. Press the TG8000 up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to change the amplitude
to the expected average value noted in step 16.
22. Repeat steps 20 and 21 until the average attenuation measured value (μ) is
within 1 mV of the corrected attenuation value, and then press the TG8000
Enter button to save the new amplitude calibration value.
23. Record the new measured attenuation corrected value in the Signal 1A
amplitude row After adjustment value column of the SDI output amplitude
table.
24. Press the Back button to exit the Channel 1: Top Calibration mode.
25. Move the 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the SDI7 Signal 1A output to the
Signal 1B output.
26. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select Channel 1: Bottom to
adjust the Signal 1B output, and then press the ENTER button.
27. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.
28. Repeat steps 18 through 24 for the Signal 1B output.
29. Move the 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the SDI7 Signal 1B output to the
Signal 2A output.
30. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select Channel 2: Top to
adjust the Signal 2A output, and then press the ENTER button.

14–8 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module adjustment procedures

31. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.
32. Repeat steps 18 through 24 for the Signal 2A output.
33. Move the 1 m high-bandwidth cable from the SDI7 Signal 2A output to the
Signal 2B output.
34. Use the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to select Channel 2: Bottom to
adjust the Signal 2B output, and then press the ENTER button.
35. Press the right (►) arrow button to select 20 Bits Square, and then press
the ENTER button.
36. Repeat steps 18 through 24 for the Signal 2B output.
37. Cycle the power on the TG8000 to return the generator to normal operating
mode.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–9


SDI7 module theory of operation

SDI7 module theory of operation


This section describes the basic operation of the major circuit blocks in the SDI7
module. The discussions relate to the Block Diagram. (See Figure 14-1.)
There is some circuitry on the SDI7 Main circuit board which is not used. Unused
circuitry is not represented in the block diagram, nor is it discussed in this theory
of operation.

Overview
The SDI7 module has four circuit boards: the main module board, which mounts
horizontally and contains the bulk of the circuitry, and three small output boards.
These output boards plug into the main board vertically and provide the rear BNC
connections and the circuits required to buffer the high-speed output signals.
The heart of the SDI7 generator is an FPGA, with other circuits that provide
support and ancillary functions. For signal generation, the FPGA creates the
output signal such as color bars or a ramp. For some signals, the information to
create the signals is completely contained within the FPGA. For other signals,
data from the memories is used as well. Serialization and scrambling is also
done in the FPGA.

FPGA and associated circuits


A Programmable Logic Device (PLD) configures the FPGA by loading a file from
the Flash at power up. This configures the FPGA for normal operation; there is
a separate file for calibration.
The CPU interface connects to both the PLD and FPGA. During SW upgrade, the
Flash files are loaded from the mainframe via the PLD. The FPGA uses the CPU
connection to access the control registers.

Signal generation The FPGA contains horizontal and vertical counters which create the raster
structure for the selected signal. For most test signals, these counters drive the
FPGA elements that create the actual video signals such as color bars or flat field,
along with the EAV and SAV info and CRCs if appropriate. The video signals
are then scrambled, serialized, and sent at 270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s or 3 Gb/s from
the FPGA to the output boards.
When generating frame picture signals, similar horizontal and vertical counters
access the DDR memory for the given channel. In this mode, the data from the
user's picture file is used to create the test signal. This data stream is combined
with the standard test signal stream to add the other required elements and the
result is then serialized.

14–10 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module theory of operation

For logo overlay, the frame picture system is used, but only for a portion of the
image. The user logo information is read from the DDR memory, and blended
with the test signal information.
The circle and text overlay functions are generated from the SRAM for each
channel. This data is blended with the active portion of the test signal or frame
picture information to produce the combined signal information.

Clocks and frames


The mainframe provides three frame pulse signals. The actual frame signal used
is the appropriate one for the rate of the signal being generated. The selected input
frame resets the counters in the FPGA, establishing the correct video timing.
The mainframe also provides a 54 MHz clock for generator mode. This 54 MHz
clock drives a DDS in the FPGA to create a digitized sine wave, which is then
applied to the flexible generator clock circuit. Depending on the output format
the flexible clock output is at either 148.5 MHz or 148.35 MHz. This clock is fed
back to the FPGA to drive the generator core functions, and sent to the FPGA
serializer clock inputs and the trigger output multiplexer.
The 54 MHz input clock also registers the input frame pulse. After it is registered
at 54 MHz it needs to cross to the 148.5 MHz domain. For this to work
deterministically the phase of the two clocks is automatically controlled. The
status of this automatic control system is shown in the module diagnostic menu as
DDS0 phase (channel 1) and DDS1 phase (channel 2).

Output boards
Trigger output The Trigger Output board provides a trigger output, which the user can select to
be the active pixel clock, the system clock, or a pulse at either line or field rate.
The output is 50 Ω, to drive typical oscilloscope inputs.

SDI output The two SDI Output boards (one for each output channel) take two channels from
the FPGA serializers and buffers them to drive 75 Ω cable. The output level is set
by non-volatile electronic potentiometers on the output board, so the calibration is
captured in the board.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–11


SDI7 module theory of operation

Figure 14-1: Simplified block diagram of the SDI7 Generator module

Power supplies
There are three switching supplies, and several linear supplies in the module.
Most of the power for the module comes in as 5 V and is converted to the voltage
needed by the switching supplies. The mainframe supplies a small amount of
3.3 V for the processor interface, but the bulk of the 3.3 V used on the board
is produced by the switching supply.
There are also 1.8 V and 1.2 V supplies, which are used for the memory and
FPGA cores.

14–12 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module troubleshooting

SDI7 module troubleshooting


This section contains instructions and procedures to troubleshoot the SDI7
module. These procedures will help you decide whether it is necessary to replace
your module.
If the TG8000 mainframe does not boot up or if the display is not working, refer
to the Mainframe troubleshooting section in this manual. (See page 2-10.)

Required equipment
The equipment listed here is needed to troubleshoot the SDI7 module.

Table 14-3: Equipment required to troubleshoot the SDI7 module


Equipment Requirement Suggested equipment
TG8000 mainframe For the SDI7 module under test Tektronix TG8000
HD Waveform monitor Must be able to display 3 Gb/s SDI signal Tektronix WFM7120
and jitter
Oscilloscope >500 MHz bandwidth, 50 Ω input Tektronix DPO4104
Digital Multimeter Used to check power supply voltages and Fluke 87 or equivalent
fuses
75 Ω BNC cables (2) Length: 42 inches, used to connect the Tektronix part number 012-0074-00
instruments
50 Ω BNC cable (1) Length: 43 inches, used to test trigger Tektronix part number 012–0057–01
output
ROHS compliant ESD safe soldering The SDI7 boards do not contain any
workstation user-serviceable parts, but any soldering
must be ROHS compliant
Other TG8000 modules Used to test mainframe operation BG7, AVG7, or DVG7

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–13


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Problem identification
If there is a problem, first perform the SDI7 Performance Verification procedure,
found in the TG8000 Specifications and Performance Verification manual,
available on the Web at www.tektronix.com/manuals. Any problems found with
that procedure can be a starting point for troubleshooting.
General problems and actions to follow are shown in the following table.

Table 14-4: SDI7 troubleshooting


Problem Actions
• Fails Power On Self Test (POST) • Run power on test procedure.
• SDI7 does not appear in menu • Run power on in Factory mode test procedure.
• Check for current software.
• Run power supply test.
• Perform swap modules procedure.
• No output from Signal BNCs • Run power on test procedure.
• Check diagnostics reported values.
• Run power supply test.
• Verify configuration.
• Perform swap modules procedure.
• No signal at Trigger Output BNC • Check diagnostics reported values.
• Run Test Multiple Frame Rate procedure.
• Verify configuration.
• Check diagnostics reported values.
• Generator video color errors • Verify configuration.
• Perform swap modules procedure.
• Unstable video • Check diagnostics reported values.
• Excessive jitter • Run Test Multiple Frame Rate procedure.
• Generator output lost when • Run Test Multiple Frame Rate procedure.
format is changed
• No 3 Gb/s signal formats available • Verify that Option 3G is enabled. (See page 14-25,
in the menus Verify that Option 3G is enabled.)
• Frame picture mode is not • Run the Check module diagnostics procedure. (See
working page 14-15.)
• Run the Download a frame picture with a known good
image procedure. (See page 14-26.)
• If no other problem found, replace the SDI7 module.

14–14 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Troubleshooting procedures
Power on self test When you first apply power to a TG8000, it runs a Power On Self Test (POST).
If an error is encountered during this POST the display will show one of several
error codes. (See Table 14-5.) Watch the display during boot up and note any
error codes. Error codes may appear for as short a time as three seconds.

Table 14-5: POST error codes


Error
code Meaning Action
1: No trigger board in slot 0 - The input module is not detected Replace the Trigger module.
by the processor.
2: No output board in slot 1 or slot 2 - The output module is not Replace the Output module.
detected by the processor.
3: PLD keyword != 0xAAAA - The processor did not read the These errors indicate a failure of basic
correct code interfacing to the module. communications between the mainframe processor
4: PLD keyword != 0x5555 - The processor did not read the and the PLD on the module. If possible, try the
correct code interfacing to the module. module in another slot or mainframe. If that is
not possible, or if that fails, then replace the
SDI7 module.
5: FPGA not configured Check the SW version. If necessary, reload the
Module flash that holds the FPGA configuration
file. If the SW is current and correctly installed
and this error is still encountered, then replace the
SDI7 module.
6: FPGA R/W check 0x55 failed (0x20040A) These errors indicate the main processor cannot
7: FPGA R/W check 0x55 failed (0x20040C) communicate with the FPGA on the SDI7 module.
8: FPGA R/W check 0xAA failed (0x20040A) If possible, try the module in another slot or
9: FPGA R/W check 0xAA failed (0x20040C) mainframe. If that is not possible, or if that fails,
then replace the SDI7 module.

Check the module There are several internally detected physical measurements which are reported
diagnostics by the SDI7 module diagnostics. Some of the diagnostic tests are available only
in factory mode.
Perform the following procedure to access the module diagnostics:
1. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–15


SDI7 module troubleshooting

2. Press the Module button to select SDI7 [x-1].


3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to choose Diagnostics, and then
press the Enter button to enter the diagnostics submenu.
4. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow buttons to scroll through the following
diagnostic tests:
PLL Status: Flex0:Lock (output channel 1) and Flex1:Lock (output
channel 2) should be displayed. If the appropriate Locked message is not
displayed when expected, it can indicate a problem with the module or
with the input clock from the mainframe.
DDS Status: DDS0 Phase:Lock (output channel 1) and DDS1 Phase:Lock
(output channel 2) should be displayed. If the appropriate Locked message
is not displayed when expected, it can indicate a problem with the module
or with the input clock from the mainframe.
Temperatures: The SDI7 module detects the temperature on the board.
This temperature is normally about 15 °C above ambient temperature.
If the temperature is very high or low, check that the fan is operating,
the installation clearances are correct, and that all cables are connected
properly. If there is still a problem, replace the SDI7 module.
FPGA Version: Current: shows the FPGA version that is loaded.
Expected: shows the version that the operating firmware expects. If these
are different, consider upgrading the firmware.
Voltage Mon (1, 2, 3, & 4): All internal voltages except the mainframe
+5 V supply are measured and displayed with “OK” if they are within the
established limits (+1.2 V, +1.5 V, +1.8 V, and +3.3 V). If any voltages are
out of the established limits, the SDI7 module must be replaced.
DDS Sweep: This diagnostic capability is available only in factory mode
and is not used in normal module troubleshooting. If you run this test, you
must restart the instrument to continue.
SRAM Address Bus (1, 2, & 3): Each of the 18 dashes represents one
address bus line. A dash “-” indicates OK, “S” indicates shorted, “H”
indicates stuck high, and “L” indicates stuck low.
SRAM Data Bus (1, 2, & 3): Each of the 16 dashes represents one data
bus line. A dash “-” indicates OK, “S” indicates shorted, “H” indicates
stuck high, and “L” indicates stuck low.
SRAM Memory Test: Press the ENTER button to start the test. The test
takes approximately 60 seconds to complete. If 0 bad sectors detected is
not displayed, replace the SDI7 module.

14–16 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module troubleshooting

DDR2 Address Bus (1 & 2): Each of the 15 dashes represents one
address bus line. A dash “-” indicates OK, “S” indicates shorted, “H”
indicates stuck high, and “L” indicates stuck low.
DDR2 Data Bus (1 & 2): Each of the 16 dashes represents one data bus
line. A dash “-” indicates OK, “S” indicates shorted, “H” indicates stuck
high, and “L” indicates stuck low.
DDR2 Memory Test: Press the ENTER button to start the test. The test
takes approximately 7 seconds to complete. If 0 errors detected is not
displayed, replace the SDI7 module.
5. Remove power and then reapply power to the TG8000 to exit factory mode.

Check the installed Use this procedure to check the installed firmware versions:
firmware version 1. Access the UTILITY menu.
a. From the TG8000 main menu, press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow
buttons to select UTILITY.
b. Press the ENTER button to enter the UTILITY submenu.
2. Access the Software Version information.
a. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow buttons to select VERSION INFO
(F/W).
b. Note the firmware version.
3. If the CPU is not Version 1.1 or later, then install current software. The latest
software is available on the Web at www.tektronix.com/software.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–17


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Verify the configuration To eliminate the configuration of the module as the source of a problem, reset the
module to the factory default settings:
1. If necessary, save the user configuration in a preset. (The user configuration
may already be saved as the power on preset.)
2. Restore the factory default:
a. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears.
b. Press Enter to select Preset.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
e. Press the ENTER button to reset the instrument to the factory default
settings.
f. Press the BACK button to return the TG8000 main menu.
3. Check to see if the problem still exists.
If the problem has been fixed, compare the settings between the factory default
and the user configuration to find the issue. (See Table 14-6.)

Table 14-6: SDI7 module factory default settings


Menu item name Settings
TEST SIGNAL 100% Color Bars
FORMAT 1080 59.94i
SAMPLE STRUCTURE/DEPTH YCbCr 4:2:2 10b
OUTPUT MODE HD (1920 x 1080)
MOVING PICTURE
H Step 0 Sample(s)
V Step 0 Line(s)
Period 1 Frame(s)
Random Disable

14–18 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Table 14-6: SDI7 module factory default settings (cont.)


Menu item name Settings
OVERLAY : LOGO
Status Disable
Source Tektronix_logo_500x125.bmp
NOTE. The default logo is the "first" file in the
SDI7/LOGO directory, as sorted by the date of
the logo file (oldest first). If the factory-provided
logo files are installed, the default logo is
“Tektronix_logo_500x125.bmp.”
However, if the user has removed the
factory-provided logo files and added their own
custom files, then the default logo will be the oldest
file installed in the SDI7/LOGO directory.
X Position –5 % APW
Y Position –5 % APH
OVERLAY : ID TEXT
Status Disable
Source User-entered string
X Position 5.0 % APW
Y Position 5.0 % APH
Font Size 8.0 % APH
OVERLAY : CIRCLE
Status Disable
X Position 0.0 % APW
Y Position 0.0 % APH
Diameter 90.0 % APH
OVERLAY : BLINK
Text/Circle Blink Off
OVERLAY : BORDER
Text/Circle Border Enable

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–19


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Table 14-6: SDI7 module factory default settings (cont.)


Menu item name Settings
AUDIO (EMBEDDED)
Status (Level A)
Group 1–4 Disable
Status (Level B)
Group 1–4 Link A Disable
Group 1–4 Link B Disable
Channel
Status Active
Frequency 1000
Amplitude –20 dBFS
Audio Click OFF
Channel Origin A1-1 through A4-4
Sampling Frame
TIMING
Vertical 0 Line(s)
Horizontal 0.0000 μs
Relative To Serial (0H)
TIMECODE
Source Program Time
30 Drop Frame Enable
ATC-LTC OFF
ATC-VITC OFF
VIDEO
Y ON
Cb ON
Cr ON
Edge Filter Enable
AV Timing Mode OFF
EDH ON
(SD output mode only)

14–20 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Table 14-6: SDI7 module factory default settings (cont.)


Menu item name Settings
ANC PAYLOAD
Output Disable
Parity Automatic
DID 0x101
SDID 0x200
DC 0x101
UDW 0x200
CS 0x200
Auto-Calculate CS Enable
Line 9
Field 1, Line: 9
Field 2, Line: 9
Start Sample 1928
Video Channel Luma
Link Location Link A
Stream Location HS Stream 1
SMPTE 352 PAYLOAD Enable
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Clock System Clock
Source CH1
SECONDARY OUTPUT Test Pattern

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–21


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Check the power supplies The module diagnostics check most of the power supplies, but there are two that
need manual verification.
1. Remove the TG8000 top cover. (See page 2-25, Top cover.)
2. Check the +5 V supply by measuring the voltage at F121, which should be in
the range of +4.75 V to +5.25 V. (See Figure 14-2.) This fuse is located under
one of the mainframe support bars, and is difficult to access.
3. Check the +3.3 V supply by measuring the voltage at F122, which should be
in the range of +3.135 V to +3.465 V. (See Figure 14-2.) This fuse is located
under one of the mainframe support bars, and is difficult to access.
Make sure that the voltage is present on both ends of the fuse. If the voltage is
present on only one end of the fuse the module must be replaced. If the voltage
is not present on either end of the fuse, check the mainframe power and the
connector between the module and the mainframe. If they are okay, the mainframe
must be repaired.

Figure 14-2: SDI7 power supply test points

14–22 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Check the multiple frame The mainframe provides three frame pulses which are used to set the module
rates timing relative to the rest of the instrument. Different frame pulses are used,
depending on the signal format the instrument is set for. Use this procedure to
investigate problems in that circuitry.
1. Connect the SDI7 outputs to a waveform monitor.
2. Apply power to the TG8000 mainframe.
3. Recall the Factory Default preset as follows:
a. Press the MODULE button until TG8000 appears.
b. Press Enter button to select Preset.
c. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button to select RECALL.
d. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select Factory Default.
e. Press the ENTER button to reset the instrument to the factory default
settings.
f. Press the BACK button to return the TG8000 main menu.
4. Verify that all four SDI7 signal outputs (SIGNAL 1A, SIGNAL 1B, SIGNAL
2A, and SIGNAL 2B) are set to provide a 59.94, 1080i format, 100% color
bar signal (factory default signal).
5. Check the DDS0:Phase and DDS1:Phase lock status, as described in the
Module Diagnostics. (See page 14-15, Check the module diagnostics.).
6. Change the SDI7 channel 1 signal format to 50 Hz:
a. Press the MODULE button to select SDI7[x-1] (channel 1).
b. Press the FORMAT button to enter the SDI7 format menu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 50i.
7. Change the SDI7 channel 2 signal format to 24 Hz:
a. Press the MODULE button to select SDI7[x-2] (channel 2).
b. Press the FORMAT button to enter the SDI7 format menu.
c. Press the left (◄) or right (►) arrow button to select 1080 24p.
8. Check the DDS0:Phase and DDS1:Phase lock status, as described in the
Module Diagnostics. (See page 14-15, Check the module diagnostics.).
If one of the formats (59.94 Hz, 50 Hz, or 24 Hz) works correctly, but the other
one does not, the mainframe sync pulse may be missing. Perform the Swap
modules procedure, below, to determine the source of the problem.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–23


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Swap modules The interface between the mainframe and the module may make it difficult to
determine whether the problem lies in the mainframe or in the module. Trying the
SDI7 module in another slot or in a known good mainframe is a simple way to
quickly isolate which is at fault.
1. Try the SDI7 module in a known good mainframe, or in another slot where a
DVG7, BG7, AVG7, or HD3G7 module is known to work correctly. These
modules use the same clocks and frame pulses. If the SDI7 module works
correctly here, replace or repair the original mainframe.
2. Try another SDI7 module (or a DVG7, BG7, AVG7, or HD3G7 module,
all of which use the same clocks and frame pulses) in the same mainframe
and slot. If another module works correctly in the original slot, then replace
the SDI7 module.

Power up in factory mode Putting the instrument into factory mode allows access to calibration, but it also
allows the module to show in the menus even if it fails the POST routine.
1. Restart the instrument in Factory mode:
a. Press and hold the MODULE, ENTER, and Front Panel ENABLE
buttons simultaneously.
b. Continue holding the buttons until the message TG8000 Booting...
displays.
c. When the message TG8000 Booting... displays, release the MODULE
and ENTER buttons. Continue holding the Front Panel ENABLE
button.
d. When the message TG8000 Start up with Factory Mode displays,
release the Front Panel ENABLE button.
2. Run the Check module diagnostics routine. (See page 14-15, Check the
module diagnostics.)

14–24 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Verify that Option 3G is If your SDI7 module has Option 3G enabled, an option key was entered in order to
enabled enable the 3G software option. Each option key applies to only one SDI7 module.
You need to enter the option key only once. After the option key is entered, the
option key stays with that SDI7 module, enabling Option 3G even when the
module is moved to another TG8000 mainframe or to a TG700 mainframe that is
running software version 5.6 or above.
Perform the following steps to verify that Option 3G is enabled on your SDI7
module:
1. Press the front-panel MODULE button until the mainframe main menu is
displayed as shown below.

2. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY is
displayed, and then press the ENTER button.

3. Press the up (▲) or down (▼) arrow button until TG8000 : UTILITY :
OPTIONS ENABLED is displayed. The bottom line of the display will
list the slot number in which the SDI7 module is installed and will indicate
whether option 3G is enabled: None is displayed when the option is not
enabled, 3G is displayed when the option is enabled.

NOTE. If more than one SDI7 module is installed in the mainframe, use the left
(◄) or right (►) arrow button to select the desired module, and then press the
ENTER button.

4. Press the BACK button to exit the UTILITY submenu. This returns to the
mainframe main menu.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–25


SDI7 module troubleshooting

Download a frame picture If you are having problems with generating a frame picture with the SDI7 module,
with a known good image perform the following steps to install a known good frame picture so that you can
determine whether the problem is with the signal you were trying to generate or
with the module:
1. If necessary, install the TGComm application on your PC. You can install
the software from the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD
that was shipped with the instrument or from the Tektronix Web site
(www.tektronix.com/software).
2. Use the TGComm application to download one of the sample frame pictures
from the TG8000 SW Library and Documentation DVD. The sample images
are located in the SAMPLE/SDI7 directory on the DVD.

NOTE. The images are provided in subdirectories named after the native
resolutions for 525, 625, 720, and 1080 line systems. For general testing, load a
1080 x 1920 image. The color bar frame pictures provide a known signal and are
available in most sizes.

3. Configure the SDI7 module to output a 1080i 59.94 format HD signal.


4. Press the OTHER button to access the frame picture menu, and then use the
left and right arrow buttons to select the file you downloaded from the DVD.
Press the ENTER button to load that signal into the generator.
5. Check to see if the SDI7 module is outputting a proper frame picture:
If the SDI7 module generates a frame picture with the signal downloaded
from the DVD but does not when using a customer signal, then the
problem is probably something in the customer signal.
If the SDI7 module does not generate a frame picture with the signal
downloaded from the DVD, then there is probably a problem with the
SDI7 module.

14–26 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module removal and replacement

SDI7 module removal and replacement


This section contains instructions on how to remove and replace the customer
replaceable parts of the SDI7 module.

CAUTION. To avoid damage to this module, do not expose it to sprays, liquids, or


solvents. Do not flex the circuit board if you remove the board from its mounting
shield. The circuit board can be damaged by flexing. The shield provides
necessary structural support to the circuit board.

Required tools
Table 14-7: Required tools for SDI7 module removal and replacement
Tektronix part
Name Description number
Torque driver Accepts 1/4 inch screwdriver bits. Torque range Standard tool
of 5 to 14 in/lb.
T10 TORX tip TORX driver bit for T10 size screw heads Standard tool
P1 Pozidriv tip Pozidriv driver tip for P1 size screw heads Standard tool
Flat or Phillips tip Small tip for removing the module from the Standard tool
mainframe
9/16 inch wrench Wrench or deep nut driver, to remove nuts Standard tool
from BNC connectors

To remove the SDI7 module


Refer to the Module installation and removal section to remove the SDI7 module
from the mainframe. (See page 1-10.)

To disassemble the SDI7 module


Disassembly of the SDI7 module is a straightforward process. Refer to the
illustration in the SDI7 module replaceable parts list if necessary. (See
Figure 14-4 on page 14-31.) Make sure to retain all the screws, fasteners, and
fittings for reassembly.

NOTE. The Trigger Output and SDI Output circuit boards can only be separated
from the Main board after the entire circuit board assembly has been removed
from the chassis. It may be necessary to clean off parts of the old gap pad from
the heat sink and the back of circuit board.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–27


SDI7 module removal and replacement

To reassemble the SDI7 module


Reassembly is more complex than disassembly, and must be done in a specific
order to prevent damage to the SDI7 module. These procedures will start as if the
instrument has been completely disassembled. You may start at an appropriate
step and proceed to the end.

Installing the heat sink. Follow this procedure to install the heat sink.

NOTE. You can reuse a removed heat sink, but you must use a new gap pad.

1. Place the heat sink on the work surface as shown, with the bosses up.

2. Peel the protective film off of one side of the gap pad, and adhere the gap
pad to the top of the heat sink.
3. Peel the protective film off of the top side of the gap pad.
4. Position the SDI7 Main circuit board over the heat sink and gap pad, aligning
the holes in the circuit board (on each side of the FPGA) with the threaded
bosses of the heat sink. Press the circuit board down slightly to adhere the
gap pad to the circuit board.
5. Loosely install two of the T10 TORX screws through the circuit board and
into the heat sink.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the FPGA, do not tighten these screws at this
time.

Reinstall the circuit board Follow this procedure to reinstall the circuit board assembly into the chassis.
into the chassis Refer to the illustration in the SDI7 module replaceable parts list if necessary.
(See Figure 14-4 on page 14-31.)
1. Install the Trigger Output circuit board (878-0588-xx) into J910 of the Main
circuit board.
2. Install the first SDI Output circuit board (878-0602-xx) into J917 of the Main
circuit board, and then install the second into J922.
3. Slide the circuit board assembly onto the chassis, guiding the BNC connectors
through the holes in the rear panel.

14–28 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module removal and replacement

4. Loosely install the six T10 TORX screws that attach the Main circuit board to
the chassis.

CAUTION. To prevent damage to the circuit boards and to the FPGA, do not
tighten these screws at this time.

5. If necessary, position the outer rear panel over the BNC connectors.
6. Install the three P1 Posidriv flathead screws, from the bottom through the
chassis into the heat sink. Torque these screws to 5.0 in/lb.
7. Replace the washers and 9/16 inch nuts onto the BNC connectors. Torque
these nuts to 14.0 in/lb.
8. Tighten the eight T10 screws that attach the Main circuit board to the chassis
and to the heat sink, in the sequence shown below. (See Figure 14-3.) Note
that the two screws that attach the Main board to the heat sink are tightened
last (7 and 8). Torque all these screws to 8.0 in/lb.

Figure 14-3: SDI7 module main board installation


The SDI7 module is now ready to install in the mainframe.

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–29


SDI7 module replaceable parts list

SDI7 module replaceable parts list


This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the SDI7 module. Use
this list to identify and order replacement parts. For parts ordering or servicing
information, refer to the Mainframe replaceable parts list section of this manual.
(See page 2-35.)
This section contains a list of the replaceable parts and modules for the SDI7
module. Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.

Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1-1972.

Replaceable parts The following tables list the replaceable parts for the SDI7 module.

Table 14-8: SDI7 module – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
11-5-1 116-1162-00 1 MODULE ASSEMBLY; SDI7
-2 211-0408-00 8 SCR, ASSY, WSHR; 4-40 X 0.250, PNH, STEEL, ZINC FINISH, T-10 TORX DR,
SEMS
-3 878-0588-00 1 CIRCUIT BD SUBASSEMBLY; TRIGGER OUTPUT; 389409500 WIRED
-4 878-0602-00 1 CIRCUIT BD SUBASSEMBLY; SDI OUTPUT; 389409600 WIRED
-5 131-M057-00 5 CONN, RF: PCB, FEMALE, BNC, 75 OHM, EDGE LAUNCH TYPE
-6 348-1944-00 1 GAP PAD 3000S30
-7 214-5166-01 1 HEATSINK, PCB TO CHASSIS
-8 441-2555-00 1 CHASSIS, MODULE
-9 333-4663-00 1 PANEL, REAR
-10 214-4762-00 2 SPRING; CONICAL
-11 211-0911-00 2 SCREW, MACHINE; M2.5, PITCH 0.45 MM, LENGTH 11 MM, HEAD DIA 5 MM,
HEAD HEIGHT 2 MM, BRIGHT NICKEL FINISH STEEL, SLOTTED PHILLIPS
-12 220-0497-00 4 NUT, PLAIN, HEX; .5-28 X .562 HEX, BRS, NI (NICKEL) PLATED
-13 210-1039-00 4 WASHER, LOCK; 0.521 ID, INT, 0.025 THK, STEEL, ZINC FINISH
-14 211-0101-00 3 SCREW, MACHINE; 4-40 X 0.25, FLH, 100 DEG, ZINC PLATED STEEL, T8
-15 348-A128-00 2.5 SHLD GASKET, ELEK: FINGER TYPE, 5.1 MM LX6.4 MM W, BE-CU [97-645-02]
cm
-16 878-0580-00 1 CIRCUIT BOARD SUBASSY; SDI7 TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR, UNTESTED,
389409300 ROHS COMPLIANT

14–30 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual


SDI7 module replaceable parts list

Figure 14-4: SDI7 module – replaceable parts

TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual 14–31


SDI7 module replaceable parts list

Table 14-9: SDI7 module main board – replaceable parts


Fig. &
index Tektronix Serial no. Serial no.
number part number effective discont'd Qty Name & description
11-6-1 159-5022-00 2 FUSE; 5.0 A, 125 V; FAST BLOW, 0.1 X 0.1 X 0.24, UL REG, CSA CERT; 451005,
SAFETY CONTROLLED
-2 159-0463-00 1 FUSE; SMD: 2 A, 32 V, FAST ACTING, 0.024 OHM, 0603 SIZE, UL/CSA REG,
SAFETY CONTROLLED, TAPE & REEL, 5000 PCS, PB FREE

Figure 14-5: SDI7 module main board – replaceable parts

14–32 TG8000 Multiformat Test Signal Generator Service Manual

You might also like